FCC ID: PPD-AR5B125 802.11 b/g/n PCIe module

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To obtain the latest information in this guide, contact support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: February 2014 Document Part Number: 753647-001 Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Starting right ...................................................................................................................................................... 1 Visit the HP Apps Store ........................................................................................................................ 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Fun things to do .................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 3 2 Getting to know your computer ......................................................................................................................... 5 Finding your hardware and software information ................................................................................. 5 Locating hardware ............................................................................................................... 5 Locating software ................................................................................................................. 5 Right side ............................................................................................................................................. 6 Left side ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 9 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand .......................................................... 10 Changing your notebook to a tablet ................................................................................... 10 Top ..................................................................................................................................................... 11 TouchPad .......................................................................................................................... 11 Lights ................................................................................................................................. 12 Speakers ............................................................................................................................ 12 Keys ................................................................................................................................... 13 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 13 3 Connecting to a network ................................................................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 15 Using the wireless button .................................................................................. 15 Using operating system controls ....................................................................... 16 Sharing data and drives and accessing software .............................................................. 16 Using a WLAN ................................................................................................................... 16 Using an Internet service provider .................................................................... 17 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................ 17 Configuring a wireless router ............................................................................ 17 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 17 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................... 18 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................ 18 Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) .......................................... 19 v Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ..................................................... 20 Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................... 20 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) ......................................................................... 20 4 Enjoying entertainment features ..................................................................................................................... 21 Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 21 Using the webcam .............................................................................................................................. 22 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 23 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 23 Connecting headphones and microphones ....................................................................... 23 Using Beats Audio ............................................................................................................. 23 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ............................................................... 23 Enabling and disabling Beats Audio .................................................................. 23 Testing your audio features ............................................................................................... 23 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable ........................................................... 24 Setting up HDMI audio ...................................................................................... 25 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays ............................. 25 5 Navigating the screen ..................................................................................................................................... 26 Using the TouchPad and gestures ..................................................................................................... 26 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 27 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 28 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 28 2-finger click ....................................................................................................................... 29 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 29 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 29 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 30 Top-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 30 Using touch screen gestures .............................................................................................................. 31 One-finger slide ................................................................................................................. 31 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 32 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 32 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 33 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 34 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 34 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 34 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe .......................................................... 35 Using the keyboard and mouse .......................................................................................................... 35 Using the keys ................................................................................................................... 35 Using the action keys ........................................................................................ 35 vi Using Windows shortcut keys ........................................................................... 36 Using the hot keys ............................................................................................. 37 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................. 38 Initiating Sleep and Hibernation ......................................................................................................... 38 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep .................................................................................. 39 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) ....................................... 39 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 39 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................ 40 Running on battery power .................................................................................................................. 40 Factory-sealed battery ....................................................................................................... 40 Finding battery information ................................................................................................ 40 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 40 Identifying low battery levels .............................................................................................. 41 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................. 41 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ........................ 41 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ..................... 41 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....... 41 Running on external AC power .......................................................................................................... 41 Troubleshooting power problems ...................................................................................... 42 HP CoolSense .................................................................................................................................... 43 Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) .......... 43 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ........................................................................................... 43 7 Maintaining your computer .............................................................................................................................. 45 Improving performance ...................................................................................................................... 45 Using HP 3D DriveGuard ................................................................................................... 45 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ................................................................ 45 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 45 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 46 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 46 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................... 46 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................... 47 Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) .............................................. 47 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................... 47 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse ................................................... 47 Traveling with or shipping your computer ........................................................................................... 47 8 Securing your computer and information ........................................................................................................ 49 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 49 vii Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 50 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 50 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................... 50 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................... 51 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................... 51 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................. 51 Installing critical security updates ...................................................................................... 51 Installing HP and third-party software updates .................................................................. 51 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................... 52 Backing up your software applications and information ..................................................................... 52 Using an optional security cable lock ................................................................................................. 52 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ............................................................ 53 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 53 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 53 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 53 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 54 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ...................................................................................... 54 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device ............................... 55 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................................................... 56 Creating recovery media and backups ............................................................................................... 56 Creating HP Recovery media ............................................................................................ 56 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 57 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................... 58 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 58 Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ...................................... 58 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................... 59 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................... 59 Removing the HP Recovery partition ................................................................................. 59 11 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 60 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 60 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 60 12 Electrostatic Discharge ................................................................................................................................. 61 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 62 viii 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the Start screen. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. 2. 3. From the Start screen, select the Store app. Select HP Picks to view all the available apps. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. Best practices To get the most out of your smart investment, after you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps:

If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 15. Take a minute to browse the printed Windows Basics guide to explore the new Windows features. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 5 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 21. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 51. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Fun things to do You know that you can watch a YouTube video on the computer. But did you know that you can also connect your computer to a TV or gaming console? For more information, see Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable on page 24. You know that you can listen to music on the computer. But did you know that you can also stream live radio to the computer and listen to music or talk radio from all over the world? See Using audio on page 23. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 You know that you can create a powerful presentation with Microsoft applications. But did you know you can also connect to a projector to share your ideas with a group? See Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable on page 24. Experience music the way the artist intended, with deep controlled bass and clear, pure sound. See Using Beats Audio on page 23. Use the TouchPad and the new Windows touch gestures for smooth control of images and pages of text. See Using the TouchPad and gestures on page 26. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right More HP resources You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Overview of using Windows A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips Online chat with an HP technician Email support Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including proper battery disposal information Specific warranty information about this computer Resource Setup Instructions Windows Basics guide Help and Support To access Help and Support, from the Start screen, type help, and then from the Search window, select Help and Support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select User guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this guide:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Limited Warranty*

To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select Warranty and services. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA More HP resources 3 Resource Contents Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. 4 Chapter 1 Starting right 2 Getting to know your computer Finding your hardware and software information Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select System, and then click Device Manager in the left column. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. To find out information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc. Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

From the Start screen, click the down arrow in the lower-left corner of the screen. Finding your hardware and software information 5 Right side Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Hard drive light Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. NOTE: For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see Using HP 3D DriveGuard on page 45. SIM slot (select models only) Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM). Memory card reader Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. USB 2.0 port USB 3.0 port HDMI port RJ-45 (network) jack/status lights Connects a network cable.

(8) AC adapter light White: The network is connected. Amber: Activity is occurring on the network. On: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Off: The computer is using battery power.

(9) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer.

(2) Power button NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. From the Start screen, type power, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep from the list of applications. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. Power light

(3)

(4)

(5) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. USB 2.0 port NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Left side 7 Component

(6) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Description Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone).

(7) Volume button Controls speaker volume. To decrease speaker volume, press the edge of the button. To increase speaker volume, press the + edge of the button. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) WWAN antennas (2)* (select models only) Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWAN). Webcam light Webcam Internal microphone WLAN antenna*

Internal display switch On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Records sound. Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Turns off the display and initiates Sleep if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The internal display switch is not visible from the outside of the computer.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Your computer can function as a classic notebook, and in addition, the display can be rotated so that the computer transforms into an entertainment stand or a tablet. Display 9 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand To change your notebook to an entertainment stand, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward to a stand position (about 315 degrees). Changing your notebook to a tablet To change your notebook to a tablet, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward until it is flush with the computer bottom (360 degrees). 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Top TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Moves the on-screen pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Description Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button NOTE: The TouchPad also supports edge-swipe gestures. For more information, see Edge swipes on page 29. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Top 11 Lights Component Description

(1)

(2) Caps lock light Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Speakers Component Speakers (2) Description Produce sound. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keys Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Labels esc key fn key Windows key Description Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the b key, the spacebar, or the esc key. Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Important system information is located on the bottom of the computer. The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Labels 13 Component

(1)

(2) Serial number Product number

(3) Warranty period

(4) Model number (select models only) Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth device (select models only)Creates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using the operating system controls. For more information, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button and one or more wireless devices, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless devices are on when you turn on the computer. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Connecting to a wireless network 15 Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

1. 2. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Network computers can exchange software and data with each other. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. To share folders or content on the same network:

1. 2. From the Windows desktop, open File Explorer. From This PC, click a folder with content you want to share. Select Share from the navigation bar at the top of the window, and then click Specific people. Type a name in the File Sharing box, and then click Add. 3. 4. Click Share and then follow the on-screen instructions. To share drives on the same network:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select Open Network and Sharing Center. 2. 3. Under View your active networks, select an active network. 4. Select Change advanced sharing settings to set sharing options for privacy, network discovery, file and printer sharing or other network options. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in configuring a wireless router, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. NOTE:

It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your computer when connected to a hotspot, limit your network activities to email that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Connecting to a wireless network 17 Use a firewall. A firewall checks information and requests that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If the device is off, the airplane mode icon displays on the Windows desktop; press the wireless button to turn the WLAN device on. From the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. Select your WLAN from the list. 3. 4. 5. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click Sign in to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-

click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 6. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use WWANs to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a cellular phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to cellular phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP supports the following technologies:

18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. LTE (Long Term Evolution), which provides access to networks supporting LTE technology. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about inserting and removing the SIM, see the Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) on page 19 section in this chapter. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. Shut down the computer. To insert a SIM, follow these steps:

1. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and then gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. NOTE: The SIM in your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. 6. Reconnect external power. Connecting to a wireless network 19 7. Reconnect external devices. 8. To remove a SIM, press in on the SIM, and then remove it from the slot. Turn on the computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. Connecting to a wired network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. NOTE:

interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents 20 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, or TV, or speakers and headphones. Multimedia features Here are some of the entertainment features on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Webcam light Webcam Description On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. From the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Internal microphone Records sound. HDMI port Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. Multimedia features 21 Component Description

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10) USB 3.0 port USB 2.0 ports Memory card reader SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connect an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Supports a wireless subscriber identity module

(SIM). Speakers (2) Produce sound. Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-

conductor connector that supports both audio-out

(headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Using the webcam The computer has an integrated webcam that records video and captures photographs. Some models may allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To start the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. For details about using the webcam, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Using audio On your computer, you can download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web

(including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 25. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones and microphones You can connect wired headphones or headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer. Many headsets with integrated microphones are commercially available. To connect wireless headphones or headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using Beats Audio Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. You can experience Beats Audio through the computer's internal speakers, through external speakers connected to a USB port, or through Beats Audio headphones connected to the headphone jack. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Use Beats Audio Control Panel to view and manually control audio and bass settings. From Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Enabling and disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio, press the fn key in combination with the b key. Testing your audio features To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. When the Sound window opens, select the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and then click Test. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. Using audio 23 Save the file to your desktop. From the Start screen, type sound, and then select Sound Recorder. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. 3. 4. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. Your computer has a high-definition multimedia interface (HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, sold separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions. 1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

24 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, adjust the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Swipe from the right edge of the Start screen, tap Devices, tap Project, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. or Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen to display the charms, click Devices, click Project, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using video 25 5 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Touch gestures Keyboard and mouse Touch gestures can be used on your computer TouchPad or on a touch screen. NOTE: An external USB mouse (purchased separately) can be connected to one of the USB ports on the computer. Review the Windows Basics guide included with your computer. The guide provides information about common tasks using the TouchPad, touch screen, or the keyboard. Your computer model has special action keys or hot key functions on the keyboard to perform routine tasks. Using the TouchPad and gestures The TouchPad allows you to navigate the computer screen and control the pointer by using simple finger movements. You can customize the touch gestures by changing settings, button configurations, click speed, and pointer options. You can also view demonstrations of TouchPad gestures. From the Start screen, type control panel, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. TIP: Use the left and right buttons on the TouchPad as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. NOTE: TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function on the TouchPad. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Using the TouchPad and gestures 27 Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. 28 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 2-finger click 2-finger click allows you to make menu selections for an object on the screen. NOTE: Using 2-finger click is the same action as using right-click with the mouse. Place two fingers on the TouchPad zone and press down to open the options menu for the selected object. Edge swipes Edge swipes allow you to perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Swipe your finger gently from the right edge to reveal the charms. Using the TouchPad and gestures 29 Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe accesses your recently opened apps so that you can switch between them quickly. Swipe your finger gently from the left edge of the TouchPad. Top-edge swipe The top-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is active, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your gently from the top edge to reveal the app command options. 30 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using touch screen gestures A touch screen computer allows you to control items on the screen directly with your fingers. TIP: On touch screen computers, you can perform the gestures on the screen or on the TouchPad. You can also perform on-screen actions with the keyboard and mouse. One-finger slide The one-finger slide is mostly used to pan or scroll through lists and pages, but you can use it for other interactions, too, such as moving an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. NOTE: When many apps are displayed on the Start screen, you can slide your finger to move the screen left or right. To drag, press and hold an object, and then drag the object to move it. Using touch screen gestures 31 Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function. Use one finger to tap an object on the screen to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving the pointer up, down, left, or right on a page or image. Place two fingers on the screen and then drag them in an up, down, left, or right motion. 32 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the screen and then moving your fingers apart. Using touch screen gestures 33 Edge swipes With edge swipes you can perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Gently swipe your finger inward from the right edge of the display onto the screen to reveal the charms. Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe reveals your open apps so that you can switch to them quickly. Gently swipe your finger inward from the left edge of the display to switch between apps. Without lifting your finger, swipe back toward the left edge to reveal all open apps. 34 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe The top-edge swipe or bottom-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is open, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your finger from the top edge or the bottom edge to reveal the app command options. Using the keyboard and mouse The keyboard and mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. on the keyboard allows you to quickly return to the Start screen from TIP: The Windows key an open app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using the keys You can quickly access information or perform functions by using certain keys and key combinations. Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the f1 through f4 keys and the f6 through f12 keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Using the keyboard and mouse 35 The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility (BIOS). See Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) on page 53 for instructions on opening Setup Utility (BIOS), and then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Icon Key f1 f2 f3 f4 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Using Windows shortcut keys Windows provides shortcuts so that you can perform actions quickly. Press the Windows key alone or in combination with a specific key to perform a designated action. For commonly used shortcuts, use the Windows Basics guide. 36 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key and the esc key, the b key, or the spacebar. To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the combination. Using the keyboard and mouse 37 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Your computer supports an optimal power plan to manage how your computer uses and conserves power so that computer performance is balanced with power conservation. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation Microsoft Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity when running on battery power or on external power. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 39. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. NOTE: You can manually initiate Hibernation. See Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 39 and Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) on page 39. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. 38 Chapter 6 Managing power Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password before the computer will return to the screen. Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. In the left pane, click Choose what the power button does. You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. 5. Click Save changes. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. 1. 2. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation 39 Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows desktop. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To reveal the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, on the Windows desktop, point over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. From the Start screen, you can also type power options, and then select Power Options. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. If the computer has a charged battery installed and the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer, the computer automatically switches to battery power and the screen brightness decreases to conserve battery life. The battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in Help and Support. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. Do not attempt to remove or replace the factory-sealed battery. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If the battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding battery information To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in HP Support Assistant. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery test Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power Tips for conserving battery power and maximizing battery life:

Lower the brightness on the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. 40 Chapter 6 Managing power Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the power meter icon on the Windows desktop shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE: For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power settings on page 40. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect an AC adapter. Connect an optional docking or expansion device. Connect an optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. 2. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Running on external AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

Running on external AC power 41 WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights are off. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Shut down the computer. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. 42 Chapter 6 Managing power HP CoolSense automatically detects when the computer is not on a horizontal surface and HP CoolSense adjusts performance and fan settings to keep the surface temperature of your computer at the optimum level of comfort. When HP CoolSense is off, the position of the computer is not detected and the performance and fan options remain at the factory setting. As a result, the surface temperature of the computer might be higher than it would be with HP CoolSense on. To turn CoolSense off or on, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type coolsense, and then select HP CoolSense. Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) When the computer is in the Sleep state, Intel Smart Connect Technology periodically causes the computer to exit Sleep. If a network connection is available, Smart Connect updates open apps such as your email inboxes, social network sites, and news pages and then returns the computer to the Sleep state. Smart Connect also syncs content that you have created offline, such as emails. When the computer exits Sleep, you have immediate access to your updated information. To enable this feature or manually adjust the settings, from the Start screen, type smart, and then select Intel Smart Connect Technology. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command:

NOTE:

Hibernation before shutdown is possible by briefly pressing the power button. 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 3. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. or HP CoolSense 43 Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen, select Shut down, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, click the Power icon, and then select Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. 44 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter provides information about improving the performance of your computer by running tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides information about updating your programs and drivers, instructions for cleaning your computer, and tips for traveling with your computer. Improving performance Everyone wants a fast computer and you can drastically improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using HP 3D DriveGuard HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Because solid state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, they do not require HP 3D DriveGuard protection. NOTE: A hard drive in a primary hard drive bay or a secondary hard drive bay is protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive is parked. To determine whether the drive is currently protected or whether it is parked, view the icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, or in the Mobility Center. Using Disk Defragmenter As you use your computer over time, the files on the hard drive become fragmented. A fragmented drive means data on your drive is not contiguous (sequential) and, because of this, the hard drive works harder to locate files, thus slowing down the computer. Disk Defragmenter consolidates (or physically reorganizes) the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. However, depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. Improving performance 45 HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Connect the computer to AC power. From the Start screen, type disk. 2. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type disk, and then select Uninstall apps to free up disk space. Follow the on-screen instructions. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis to the latest versions. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Technology is always changing, and updating programs and drivers allows your computer to run the latest technology available. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands). Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Water with mild soap solution Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. 46 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is turned on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that the display is dry before closing the display. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, here are some tips to keep in mind to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards, from the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. Traveling with or shipping your computer 47 When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device installed, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 48 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Computer viruses Unauthorized access to data Security feature Power-on password Antivirus software Firewall software Unauthorized access to Setup Utility (BIOS) settings and other system identification information Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Unauthorized removal of the computer Software updates User password Security cable lock Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every three months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, from the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using passwords 49 Setting Windows passwords Password User password Administrator password Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. NOTE:

password check, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you enter the power-on password at the first Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: A power-on password is not revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

1. To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade 50 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, from the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Microsoft Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 46. Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can choose whether updates are installed automatically. To change the settings, from the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select Windows Update, select Change settings, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Installing HP and third-party software updates HP recommends that you regularly update the software and drivers that were originally installed on your computer. To download the latest versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Installing software updates 51 If you have installed third-party software after you purchased your computer, regularly update the software. Software companies provide software updates to their products to correct security problems and improve functionality of the software. Securing your wireless network When you set up your wireless network, always enable security features. For more information, see Protecting your WLAN on page 17. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Using an optional security cable lock A security cable lock, which is purchased separately, is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Security cable locks are only one of several methods that should be employed as part of a complete security solution to help maximize theft protection. The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. For the location of the security cable slot on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 5. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable lock around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the security cable lock (2). Insert the security cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the security cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 52 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Main, and then make note of your current BIOS version. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 53). To exit Setup Utility (BIOS) without saving your changes, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Select Yes. 4. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 53 Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. From the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. 54 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 55. b. Hard drive c. BIOS 2. When the diagnostic tool opens, use the keyboard arrow keys to select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device Instructions for downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) are provided in English NOTE:

only. 1. Go to http://www.hp.com. 2. 3. Point to Support, located at the top of the page, and then click the Download Drivers. In the text box, enter the product name, and then click Go. or Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. 4. 5. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 55 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes:

Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system Creating recovery media and backups 1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. HP Recovery media you create will provide the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system and the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image RecoveryReinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. See Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. 2. Use the Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Creating HP Recovery media HP Recovery Manager is a software program that offers a way to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and the software programs installed at the factory, and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of HP Recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the blank USB flash drive or the number of blank DVD discs that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or instead you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased 56 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take up to an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue, and the remaining discs will be burned. To create HP Recovery media:

1. 2. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Recovery Media Creation, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. From the Start screen, type recovery, select HP Recovery Manager, select Drivers and Applications Reinstall, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to reset your computer using a minimized image, you can choose the HP Minimized Image Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or HP Recovery media. Minimized Image Recovery installs only drivers and hardware-enabling applications. Other applications included in the image continue to be available for installation through the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option in HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you want to recover the computer's original factory partitioning and content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or use the HP Recovery media that you have created. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. If you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media to restore the factory image to the replacement drive. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you wish to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. Restore and recovery 57 For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition on page 59. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you created or by using the HP Recovery partition (select models only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image Recovery (select models only)Reinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows System Recovery and Minimized Image Recovery. What you need to know HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. If the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you wish to retain. Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows you to perform a system recovery or minimized image recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can only be used if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

1. Press f11 while the computer boots. or 58 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media that you created, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 59. Follow the on-screen instructions. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the 3. Changing the computer boot order If computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection for an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

1. 2. Restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. 3. 4. Insert the HP Recovery media you created. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive you want to boot from. Follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you can no longer use the Windows Refresh option or the Windows option to remove everything and reinstall Windows. In addition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or Minimized Image Recovery from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 59 11 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 60 Chapter 11 Specifications 12 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded, and then remove the cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 61 Index Symbols/Numerics 2-finger pinch zoom TouchPad gesture 28 2-finger pinch zoom touchPad gesture 33 A AC adapter 6 AC adapter, testing 42 action keys decrease screen brightness 36 Help and Support 36 identifying 13 increase screen brightness 36 play, pause, resume 36 previous track or section 36 switch screen image 36 volume down 36 volume mute 36 volume up 36 wireless 36 antivirus software, using 51 audio features, testing 23 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) jack 8, 22 B backing up software and information 52 backups 56 battery discharging 40 low battery levels 41 battery information, finding 40 battery power 40 Beats Audio 23 Beats Audio Control Panel 23 Beats Audio hot key 23 BIOS determining version 53 downloading an update 54 updating 53 Bluetooth device 15, 20 Bluetooth label 14 62 Index boot order, changing 59 bottom 14 buttons left TouchPad 11 power 7 right TouchPad 11 C caps lock light, identifying 12 caring for your computer 46 cleaning your computer 46 components display 9 left side 7 right side 6 top 11 connecting to a WLAN 18 connector, power 6 corporate WLAN connection 18 critical battery level 41 critical security updates, installing 51 D deleted files restoring 57 Disk Cleanup software 46 Disk Defragmenter software 45 E edge-swipe gestures 29, 34 bottom-edge swipe 35 top-edge swipe 35 electrostatic discharge 61 esc key, identifying 13 external AC power, using 41 F firewall software 51 fn key, identifying 13, 37 fun things to do 1 H hard drive HP 3D DriveGuard 45 hard drive light 6 HDMI configuring audio 25 HDMI port connecting 24 identifying 6, 21 headphones and microphones, connecting 23 Hibernation exiting 39 initiated during critical battery level 41 initiating 39 high-definition devices, connecting 24, 25 hot keys description 37 using 37 HP 3D DriveGuard 45 HP and third-party software updates, installing 51 HP Mobile Broadband, disabled 19 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) downloading 55 using 54 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 59 starting 58 HP Recovery media creating 56 recovery 59 HP Recovery partition recovery 58 removing 59 I input power 60 installing critical security updates 51 optional security cable lock 52 internal display switch, identifying 9 internal microphone, identifying 9, 21 Internet connection setup 17 Internet security software, using 50 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 8, 22 network 6 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard hot keys, identifying 37 keys action 13 esc 13 fn 13 Windows 13 L labels Bluetooth 14 regulatory 14 serial number 13 service 13 wireless certification 14 WLAN 14 LAN, connecting 20 left-edge swipe 30, 34 lights AC adapter 6 caps lock 12 hard drive 6 mute 12 power 7 RJ-45 (network) status 6 low battery level 41 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 46 Disk Defragmenter 45 memory card inserting 6 removing 6 memory card reader, identifying 6, 22 minimized image recovery 58 minimized image, creating 58 Miracast 25 mouse, external setting preferences 26 mute light, identifying 12 N network jack, identifying 6 O operating environment 60 original system recovery 58 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 50 Windows 50 ports HDMI 6, 21, 24 Miracast 25 USB 2.0 6, 7, 22 USB 3.0 6, 22 power battery 40 power button, identifying 7 power connector, identifying 6 power lights, identifying 7 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 18 R recovery discs 56, 59 HP Recovery Manager 58 media 59 options 57 starting 58 supported discs 56 system 58 USB flash drive 59 using HP Recovery media 57 recovery media creating 56 creating using HP Recovery Manager 57 recovery partition removing 59 regulatory information regulatory label 14 wireless certification labels 14 restore Windows File History 57 right-edge swipe 29, 34 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 RJ-45 (network) status lights, identifying 6 S scrolling TouchPad gesture 28 security cable lock, installing 52 security cable slot, identifying 7 security, wireless 17 serial number 13 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 setting password protection on wakeup 39 setup of WLAN 17 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 50 shipping the computer 47 shutdown 43 SIM inserting 19 removing 19 SIM slot, identifying 6, 22 Sleep exiting 39 initiating 39 slots memory card reader 6, 22 security cable 7 SIM 6, 22 software Disk Cleanup 46 Disk Defragmenter 45 software updates, installing 51 speakers connecting 23 identifying 12, 22 supported discs, recovery 56 system recovery 58 system restore point creating 56 T tapping TouchPad gesture 27 testing an AC adapter 42 testing audio features 23 Index 63 operating system 15 Wireless Assistant software 15 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 18 corporate WLAN connection 18 equipment needed 17 functional range 18 public WLAN connection 18 security 17 using 16 wireless network, securing 52 WLAN antenna, identifying 9 WLAN device 14, 16 WLAN label 14 WWAN antennas, identifying 9 WWAN device 18 top-edge swipe 30 touch screen gestures 34 2-finger pinch zoom 33 bottom-edge swipe 35 edge-swipe gestures 34, 35 one-finger slide 31 scrolling 32 tapping 32 top-edge swipe 35 touch screen, using 31 TouchPad buttons 11 TouchPad gestures 2-finger pinch zoom 28 scrolling 28 tapping 27 TouchPad zone, identifying 11 traveling with the computer 14, 47 turning off the computer 43 U unresponsive system 43 USB 2.0 ports, identifying 6, 7, 22 USB 3.0 ports, identifying 6, 22 using external AC power 41 using passwords 49 V vents, identifying 7 video 24 volume button 8 W webcam identifying 9, 21 using 22 webcam light, identifying 9, 21 Windows File History 57 restoring files 57 system restore point 56 Windows key, identifying 13 Windows passwords 50 Wireless Assistant software 15 wireless button 15 wireless certification label 14 wireless controls button 15 64 Index

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20082011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Third Edition: August 2011 First Edition: February 2011 Document Part Number: 653267-003 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union Regulatory notices ..................................................................................................... 4 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules .................................................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 8 South Korea notice ............................................................................................................................... 8 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 8 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 9 Taiwan notices ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 9 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 9 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................... 9 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 10 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 10 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 11 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 12 iii U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 13 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 17 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 17 2 Safety notices ................................................................................................................................................ 18 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 18 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 18 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 18 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 19 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 19 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 19 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 20 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 20 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 20 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 21 China material content declarations ................................................................................................... 21 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................. 24 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 24 Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances ................................................................................... 24 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 24 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 25 iv 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. For later Windows operating systems, such as Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. To view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1 CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has wired and/or wireless telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available (in English only) either within the product documentation or at the following Web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (type the product number in the search box). The compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product:

4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices For non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth, within power class below 10 mW. For EU non-harmonized telecommunications products (if applicable, a 4-digit notified body number is inserted between CE and ! (the exclamation mark). Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The telephone connector (not available for all products) is intended for connection to analog telephone networks. NOTE: For products with wireless LAN devices, some countries may have specific obligations or special requirements about the operation of wireless LAN networks such as indoor use only or restrictions of the channels available. Be sure that the country settings of the wireless network are correct. In France, certain restrictions apply for the 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product. This product may be used indoors for the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 13). For outdoor use, only the 2400-MHz to 2454-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 7) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.arcep.fr. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Mobile Broadband Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. European Union Regulatory notices 5 The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Ergonomics notice Germany Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the ergonomic requirements and are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. When a mobile computer is used for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 This device is intended for use at visual display workplaces in compliance with BildscharbV, only with external keyboard and adequate external monitor. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 Das Gert ist fr die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV nur mit externer Tastatur und geeignetem Monitor vorgesehen. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Japan notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Bluetooth devices Japan notices 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notice Mexico notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este equipo puede que no cause interferencia y (2) este equipo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo interferencia que pueda ser causada por la operacin no deseada. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general in household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 15 minutes Initiate Sleep after 30 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Laser compliance 11 U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Modem notices 15 c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision Corporation notice 17 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Headset and earphone volume level notice 19 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service. 20 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chemical substances 21 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Japan material content declaration 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Index A airline travel notice 9 B battery notice 10, 18, 24 battery recycling 20 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 19 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 4 Canadian French notices 4 China Material Content Declarations 21 D DC plug of external HP power supply notice 17 Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 24 battery, user replacement 10 equipment 20 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 20 ENERGY STAR compliance 10 environmental notices 20 equipment disposal notice 20 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 4 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 19 J Japan material content declaration 23 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 7 Japan power cord notice 16 K keyboard notice 19 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice Mexico Sustainable Energy Use 17 Law 24 Mexico wireless notice 8 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 12 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 notices airline travel 9 battery 10, 24 battery, user replacement 18 Brazil 4 Canada 4 Canadian French 4 DC plug of external HP power supply 17 environmental 20 equipment disposal 20 ergonomics 6 European Union 4 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 19 Japan 7 Japan power cord 16 keyboard 19 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 17 Mexico 8 modem 11 perchlorate material 24 power cords 16, 19 Singapore 8 South Korea 8 Taiwan 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 travel 19 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 24 N New Zealand modem statement 15 P power cord notice 16, 19 Index 25 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 20 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 8 T Taiwan notice 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 19 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 9 19 U U.S. modem statement 12 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 24 V voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 19 W wireless LAN devices 3 26 Index

Informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation Manuel de l'utilisateur Copyright 2012 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth est une marque dtenue par son propritaire et utilise sous licence par Hewlett-Packard Company. ENERGY STAR est une marque dpose du gouvernement des tats-Unis. Java est une marque dpose de Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows et Windows Vista sont des marques dposes de Microsoft Corporation aux tats-Unis. Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. Les garanties relatives aux produits et aux services HP sont dcrites dans les dclarations de garantie limite expresse qui les accompagnent. Aucun lment du prsent document ne peut tre interprt comme constituant une garantie supplmentaire. HP ne saurait tre tenu pour responsable des erreurs ou omissions de nature technique ou rdactionnelle qui pourraient subsister dans le prsent document. Troisime dition : septembre 2012 Deuxime dition : juillet 2012 Premire dition : mars 2012 Rfrence du document : 689409-053 propos de ce manuel Ce manuel fournit des informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation en conformit avec les rglementations amricaines, canadiennes et internationales en matire d'ordinateurs portables, d'ordinateurs de bureau, de clients lgers et de stations de travail personnelles. AVERTISSEMENT ! Le non-respect des instructions expose l'utilisateur des risques potentiellement trs graves. ATTENTION : Le non-respect des instructions prsente des risques, tant pour le matriel que pour les informations qu'il contient. REMARQUE : Le texte ainsi dfini fournit des informations importantes supplmentaires. iii iv propos de ce manuel Sommaire 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables ................................................................................ 1 Rglementation FCC ............................................................................................................................ 3 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 3 Cbles .................................................................................................................................. 3 Dclaration de conformit des produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) ....... 4 Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules HP Mobile Broadband ........................... 4 Avis pour le Brsil ................................................................................................................................. 5 Avis pour le Canada ............................................................................................................................. 5 Avis pour l'Union europenne .............................................................................................................. 6 Dclaration de conformit .................................................................................................... 6 Produits quips de modules sans fil (EMF) ....................................................... 7 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) ................. 7 Avis sur l'ergonomie ............................................................................................ 8 Allemagne (texte en franais) ............................................................. 8 Allemagne (texte en allemand) ........................................................... 8 Avis pour le Japon ................................................................................................................................ 9 Priphriques LAN, priphriques WAN et marques de certification pour les priphriques Bluetooth ..................................................................................................... 10 Avis pour la Core du Sud ................................................................................................................. 10 Avis pour le Mexique .......................................................................................................................... 10 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour .................................................................................... 11 Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande ................................................................... 11 Avis pour Tawan ................................................................................................................................ 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ........................................................................................... 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11b ........................................................................................... 12 Avis sur les utilisations en vol ............................................................................................................. 12 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................ 12 Conformit ENERGY STAR ............................................................................................................ 12 Conformit du laser ............................................................................................................................ 13 Avis sur les modems .......................................................................................................................... 14 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication ................................................. 14 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................... 14 v Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis ............................................................. 16 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................ 17 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................... 17 Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................ 17 Support vocal .................................................................................................... 18 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation .................................................................................................... 18 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon ............................................................. 18 Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP .............................................................. 18 Avis de Macrovision Corporation ........................................................................................................ 19 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles ...................................................................................................................................................... 20 Avis sur les modems .......................................................................................................................... 20 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication ................................................. 20 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................... 21 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................ 22 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................... 22 Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................ 22 Assistance vocale ............................................................................................. 23 Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique ............................................................................................ 23 Avis de la FCC ................................................................................................................... 24 Modifications ..................................................................................................... 24 Cbles ............................................................................................................... 24 Dclaration de conformit pour les produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) ...................................................................................................... 25 Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil ............................................... 25 Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie ................................................... 25 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................. 26 Avis pour le Canada .......................................................................................................... 26 Avis pour l'Union europenne ............................................................................................ 26 Dclaration de conformit ................................................................................. 26 Produits quips de modules sans fil ............................................... 27 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/

fax) .................................................................................................... 28 Avis sur l'ergonomie ......................................................................... 28 Avis pour le Japon ............................................................................................................. 28 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth ....................... 29 Avis pour la Core du Sud ................................................................................................. 29 Avis pour le Mexique ......................................................................................................... 30 Avis pour Tawan ............................................................................................................... 30 vi 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables ....................................................................................... 31 Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur ....................................................................................... 31 Avis sur les risques lis la scurit .................................................................................................. 31 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................ 32 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs ................................................................ 32 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation .................................................................................................... 33 Nettoyage du clavier ........................................................................................................................... 33 Avis sur les dplacements .................................................................................................................. 33 Avis de scurit pour la Chine ............................................................................................................ 34 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................... 34 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales .......................................... 34 Norvge et Sude : notice de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ... 34 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles ...................................................................................................................................................... 35 Informations importantes relatives la scurit ................................................................................. 35 Conditions d'installation ...................................................................................................................... 36 Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie ............................................................................................. 36 Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs ............................................................................. 37 Informations de scurit relatives au laser ......................................................................................... 37 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation ............................................. 37 Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 ............................. 37 Danemark .......................................................................................................... 38 Finlande ............................................................................................................ 38 Norvge ............................................................................................................. 38 Sude ................................................................................................................ 38 Exigences relatives l'alimentation ................................................................................... 38 Pour une utilisation en Norvge ........................................................................ 38 Cordons d'alimentation requis ........................................................................................... 39 Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon ...................................................... 39 Risque de pincement .......................................................................................................................... 39 Avis de scurit pour la Chine ............................................................................................................ 40 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................... 40 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales .......................................... 40 Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne .................................................................................................... 41 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables ...................................................... 42 Recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie ......................................................................... 42 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................... 42 Substances chimiques ....................................................................................................................... 42 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine .............................................................................................. 43 vii Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ....................................... 43 Dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon ..................................................................... 46 Loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie ........................................................................... 46 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie .................................................................................................... 46 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine ................................................... 46 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................... 46 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles .......................................................................................................................................... 47 Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries .......................................................................... 47 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................... 47 Conformit ENERGY STAR (certains modles) .............................................................................. 47 Substances chimiques ....................................................................................................................... 49 Avis sur le mercure ............................................................................................................................. 49 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................... 49 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ....................................... 49 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................... 50 Dclarations IT ECO .......................................................................................................................... 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ....................................... 52 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie) ......................................................................................................... 52 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie .................................................................................................... 52

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine) .............................................................................................................. 53 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 54 viii 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre fournit des avis de rglementation spcifiques des pays et des rgions concernant les produits filaires et sans fil, ainsi que des informations de conformit concernant l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Un ou plusieurs priphriques sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer dans les avions, dans les hpitaux, proximit d'explosifs, dans des lieux dangereux, etc. Si vous n'tes pas sr des rgles qui s'appliquent ce produit, demandez si vous pouvez l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Pour identifier un priphrique matriel, tel qu'un priphrique rseau LAN sans fil (WLAN), choisissez la procdure ci-dessous qui correspond au systme d'exploitation excut sur votre ordinateur. Sous Windows Vista, procdez comme suit :

1. Slectionnez Dmarrer > Ordinateur > Proprits systme. 2. Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Gestionnaire de priphriques. Sous Windows 7, procdez comme suit :

Slectionnez Dmarrer > Panneau de configuration > Systme et scurit > Gestionnaire de priphriques. Sous Windows 8, procdez comme suit :

1. Dans l'cran d'accueil, tapez c, puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration. 2. Slectionnez Systme et scurit, puis slectionnez Gestionnaire de priphriques dans la zone Systme. La liste de tous les priphriques installs sur votre ordinateur s'affiche. Pour les systmes d'exploitation non Windows, suivez les instructions fournies par votre systme d'exploitation pour identifier un priphrique matriel tel qu'un priphrique rseau LAN sans fil

(WLAN). Des tiquettes de rglementation spcifiques votre pays ou rgion peuvent tre apposes sous le produit : sous la batterie, sous une trappe accessible par l'utilisateur (ou tout autre emplacement accessible par l'utilisateur), sur le module sans fil ou sur le modem. 1 Sous Windows 7, pour consulter le numro d'identification FCC d'un module radio de votre ordinateur portable (par exemple, Bluetooth, WLAN ou WWAN), procdez comme suit :

1. 2. 3. Allumez ou redmarrez l'ordinateur puis appuyez sur echap lorsque le message Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Pour accder au menu de dmarrage, appuyez sur la touche echap) s'affiche en bas de l'cran. Appuyez sur f10 pour accder au BIOS. Slectionnez le menu System Configuration (Configuration du systme). Sous Windows 8, procdez comme suit :

1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension ou redmarrez-le, puis appuyez sur la touche echap lorsque le message Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Pour accder au menu de dmarrage, appuyez sur la touche echap) apparat en bas de l'cran. 2. Appuyez sur f10 pour accder Computer Setup. Les identifiants FCC sont affichs en bas de l'cran. ATTENTION : Les appareils qui ne sont pas destins la vente ou une utilisation aux tats-Unis ne possdent peut-tre pas d'identifiants FCC. 2 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Rglementation FCC Le prsent quipement a t test et dclar conforme aux limites d'un appareil numrique de Classe B, telles que dfinies dans l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences prjudiciables dans un environnement rsidentiel. Le prsent quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre une nergie de radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, peut entraner des interfrences prjudiciables pour les radiocommunications. Cependant, tout risque d'interfrences ne peut tre totalement exclu dans certains environnements spcifiques. Si ce matriel devait provoquer des interfrences avec une radio ou un tlviseur, ce qu'il est facile de dceler en teignant puis en rallumant ce matriel, il est alors vivement conseill l'utilisateur d'essayer de supprimer ces interfrences en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. loigner le matriel informatique du rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur la prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Modifications La FCC stipule que l'utilisateur doit tre inform que toute modification opre sur l'appareil, n'ayant pas t expressment approuve par HP, peut entraner l'annulation des droits d'exploitation du produit dont bnficie l'utilisateur. Cbles Pour tre conformes la rglementation de la FCC, les connexions d'entre de l'appareil doivent tre tablies avec des cbles blinds munis d'embouts de connecteurs RFI/EMI mtalliques. Rglementation FCC 3 Dclaration de conformit des produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interfrences nuisibles. 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes interfrences reues, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. Si vous souhaitez poser des questions sur le produit qui ne sont pas en rapport avec cette dclaration, crivez l'adresse suivante :

Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000, tats-Unis Pour toute question concernant cette dclaration FCC, crivez-nous l'adresse suivante :

Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000, tats-Unis ou appelez HP au (281) 514-3333. Pour identifier le produit, reportez-vous au numro de rfrence, de srie ou de modle inscrit sur le produit. Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules HP Mobile Broadband Cet appareil ne doit pas tre situ proximit d'une autre antenne ou d'un metteur, ni fonctionner en mme temps. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux rayonnements de frquence radio La puissance de sortie mise par cet appareil est nettement infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par le FCC. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant le fonctionnement normal des tablettes et des ordinateurs portables. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : Pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. 4 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables ATTENTION : Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. La FCC exige que ce matriel soit utilis l'intrieur pour la plage de frquences comprise entre 5,15 et 5,25 GHz, afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence avec les systmes de satellites du service mobile du canal commun. Un radar puissance leve est allou comme premier utilisateur des bandes de frquence allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent entraner des interfrences avec cet appareil et/ou l'endommager. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences. Si ce priphrique est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) ce priphrique ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) ce priphrique doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un mauvais fonctionnement. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio : la puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. ATTENTION : Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce matriel soit utilis l'intrieur pour la plage de frquences comprise entre 5,15 et 5,25 GHz, afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence avec les systmes de satellites du service mobile du canal commun. Un radar puissance leve est allou comme premier utilisateur des bandes de frquence allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent entraner des interfrences avec cet appareil et/ou l'endommager. Les antennes de ce priphrique ne sont pas remplaables. Toute tentative d'accs par l'utilisateur endommagera l'ordinateur. Avis pour le Brsil 5 Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive relative la basse tension 2006/95/CE Directive EMC 2004/108/CE Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE La conformit CE de ce produit est uniquement valable si ce dernier est aliment par un adaptateur secteur estampill CE (le cas chant) et un cordon d'alimentation fournis par HP. Reportez-vous la section Cordons d'alimentation requis la page 39. La conformit ces directives implique la conformit aux normes europennes harmonises applicables (normes europennes) qui sont prsentes dans la dclaration de conformit de l'UE dicte par HP pour ce produit ou cette gamme de produits et disponibles soit dans la documentation du produit soit sur le site Web suivant : www.hp.eu/certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). La conformit est reprsente par la marque de conformit CE ci-aprs. Pour certains produits de tlcommunications, le numro 4 chiffres d'un organisme de certification peut tre ajout en suffixe. Reportez-vous l'tiquette de conformit appose sur le produit. La fonctionnalit de tlcommunications de ce produit peut tre utilise dans les pays de l'Union europenne et de l'AELE suivants : Allemagne, Autriche, Belgique, Bulgarie, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Estonie, Finlande, France, Grce, Hongrie, Irlande, Islande, Lettonie, Liechtenstein, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malte, Norvge, Pays-Bas, Pologne, Portugal, Rpublique tchque, Roumanie, Royaume-Uni, Slovaquie, Slovnie, Sude et Suisse. Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, contactez Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS cette adresse : HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, ALLEMAGNE. 6 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Produits quips de modules sans fil (EMF) CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES INTERNATIONALES EN MATIRE D'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONNEMENTS DE FRQUENCE RADIO. Le module sans fil intgr votre ordinateur portable est un metteur et rcepteur radio. Cet appareil est conu pour ne pas dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dfinies par des directives internationales (ICNIRP). Ces limites sont dfinies dans le cadre de directives qui tablissent les niveaux autoriss de rayonnements de frquence radio pour l'ensemble de la population. Ces directives, dictes par des organismes scientifiques indpendants, s'appuient sur une valuation rgulire et minutieuse de diffrentes tudes scientifiques. Cet appareil est galement conforme aux directives R&TTE europennes relatives la protection de la sant et de la scurit des personnes. La norme d'exposition dfinie pour les appareils mobiles utilise une unit de mesure appele SAR

(Specific Absorption Rate, taux d'absorption spcifique).* Ce taux a t obtenu via des tests au cours desquels les appareils ont effectu des transmissions au niveau de puissance certifi le plus lev, dans toutes les bandes de frquence. Le taux SAR rel de l'appareil en cours de fonctionnement peut tre bien infrieur la valeur maximale dfinie, dans la mesure o il fonctionne diffrents niveaux de puissance et utilise uniquement la puissance requise pour atteindre le rseau. Install dans l'ordinateur portable, cet appareil est conforme aux directives en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio lorsque les antennes se trouvent une distance minimale du corps. Pour transmettre des donnes ou des messages, l'appareil doit disposer d'une connexion de qualit au rseau. Dans certains cas, les transmissions de donnes ou de messages peuvent tre retardes jusqu' ce qu'une connexion soit disponible. Veillez respecter la distance conseille jusqu' la fin de la transmission.

*Les directives internationales autres que celles de la FCC indiquent que la limite SAR pour les appareils mobiles utiliss par le grand public est de 2 watts/kilogramme (W/kg), calcul sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de masse tissulaire. Ces directives incluent une marge de scurit importante pour une protection accrue du grand public et pour tenir compte des variations dans les mesures. Les valeurs SAR peuvent varier selon les exigences locales en matire de reporting et selon la bande du rseau. Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE (annexe II) sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts

(RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Avis pour l'Union europenne 7 Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Lorsqu'un ordinateur portable est utilis sur une station de travail professionnelle dans le cadre d'un travail sur cran de visualisation o la directive 90/270/CEE relative aux crans de visualisation est applicable, un clavier externe adapt est recommand. Selon l'application et le travail ralis, un moniteur externe adapt peut galement tre ncessaire pour obtenir des conditions de travail comparables celles d'une station de travail. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (certification GS volontaire) Les ordinateurs portables portant la marque d'homologation GS sont conformes aux exigences en matire d'ergonomie. Sans clavier externe, ils sont uniquement adapts aux tches ponctuelles sur cran de visualisation. Une utilisation mobile dans de mauvaises conditions de luminosit (par exemple, lumire directe du soleil) peut occasionner des reflets et donc rduire la lisibilit. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. 8 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis pour le Japon Avis pour le Japon 9 Priphriques LAN, priphriques WAN et marques de certification pour les priphriques Bluetooth This product contains certified radio equipment. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. 10 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour Mettez hors tension les priphriques WWAN lorsque vous tes bord d'avions. L'utilisation de ces appareils bord d'avions est illgale, peut tre dangereuse pour le fonctionnement de l'avion et risque de perturber le rseau de tlphonie mobile. Le non-respect de cette instruction peut entraner la suspension ou le refus de services cellulaires au contrevenant, ou des actions juridiques, ou les deux. Les utilisateurs doivent limiter l'emploi d'quipement radio dans des dpts de carburant, usines chimiques et l o des explosions sont en cours. Comme pour les autres quipements mobiles de transmission par frquences radiolectriques, il est recommand aux utilisateurs, pour le bon fonctionnement de leur quipement et pour la scurit du personnel, de ne pas trop approcher les antennes du corps humain au cours du fonctionnement de l'quipement. Ce priphrique a t conu pour tre conforme aux exigences applicables pour l'exposition aux ondes radio, en fonction de normes scientifiques qui comprennent des plages destines assurer la scurit de tout le monde, quel que soit l'ge et l'tat de sant. Ces rgles d'exposition aux ondes radio utilisent une unit de mesure appele taux d'absorption spcifique (SAR - Specific Absorption Rate). Les tests relatifs aux taux d'absorption sont mens l'aide de mthodes standardises, le tlphone transmettant son niveau de certifi le plus lev dans toutes les bandes de frquences utilises. Les informations de donnes SAR se basent sur les normes EN50360 et EN50361 de CENELEC, qui utilisent la limite de 2 watts par kilogramme, sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de tissu. Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande Cet quipement de tlcommunications est conforme aux rglementations de la NTC. Avis pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11b Avis sur les utilisations en vol L'utilisation d'quipement lectronique bord d'un avion commercial est laisse la discrtion de la compagnie arienne. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Lorsqu'une batterie atteint la fin de sa vie utile, ne la jetez pas avec les dchets mnagers ordinaires. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries d'ordinateur. HP encourage ses clients recycler les quipements lectroniques usags, les cartouches d'impression HP d'origine et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP l'adresse http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour des informations sur le retrait d'une batterie remplaable par l'utilisateur, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit. Conformit ENERGY STAR En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP a suivi le processus avanc de qualification et de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR en matire de rendement lectrique. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Le programme ENERGY STAR pour les ordinateurs a t cr par l'EPA pour encourager l'efficacit nergtique et rduire la pollution atmosphrique grce l'utilisation d'quipements meilleur 12 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables rendement lectrique chez soi, au bureau et dans les usines. Une manire d'atteindre cet objectif consiste utiliser la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Windows pour rduire la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. Cette fonction permet la mise en mode veille de l'ordinateur aprs une priode d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction avec un moniteur conforme au programme ENERGY STAR, les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation du moniteur sont galement prises en charge. Pour profiter de ces conomies d'nergie potentielles, la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation est prconfigure comme suit lorsque le systme fonctionne sur secteur :

Dsactivation de l'cran aprs 10 minutes Mise en veille aprs 20 minutes Le mode veille est dsactiv par une simple pression sur le bouton d'alimentation/de veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN d'veil par appel rseau est active, le mode veille peut galement tre dsactiv en rponse un signal du rseau. Vous trouverez des informations complmentaires sur les conomies nergtiques et financires ralisables avec la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation sur le site Web du programme ENERGY STAR de l'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), cette adresse http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Vous trouverez galement des informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), cette adresse http://www.energystar.gov. Conformit du laser AVERTISSEMENT ! L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation d'appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de pice rparable par l'utilisateur. N'utilisez pas de commandes, n'excutez aucun rglage ni aucune procdure au priphrique laser autre que ceux qui figurent dans le manuel d'installation du produit laser. Seul un mainteneur agr est autoris rparer l'unit. Ce produit peut tre fourni avec un priphrique de stockage optique (par exemple, un lecteur de CD ou DVD) et/ou un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Chacun de ces appareils qui contient un laser est class comme produit laser de classe 1 conformment la norme CEI/EN 60825-1 et rpond aux critres de scurit de cette norme. Chaque produit laser est conforme aux paragraphes 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 des rglementations FDA des tats-Unis ou est conforme ces rglementations l'exception des dviations relatives l'avis sur le laser No. 50, en date du 24 juin 2007. Conformit du laser 13 Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe en effet un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz, si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si cet appareil n'a pas t fourni avec un cordon tlphonique, n'utilisez qu'un cordon tlphonique No. 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone dans la prise rseau (RJ-45). GARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunication du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas compatible, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN 14 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu'

ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems 15 Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Reportez-vous aux dclarations du fabricant du modem ci-aprs pour le modem install dans votre ordinateur :

16 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux spcifications techniques d'Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN indique le nombre maximal d'appareils pouvant tre connects une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison d'appareils quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. La marque de certification japonaise pour le modem fax/donnes V.92 56K figure ci-dessous :

Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge par la ligne de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. *Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. b. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Avis sur les modems 17 c. d. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Support vocal Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence (111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation Si votre ordinateur ne vous a pas t livr avec un cordon d'alimentation ou un accessoire d'alimentation secteur compatible avec votre ordinateur, vous devrez acheter un cordon d'alimentation homologu pour votre pays ou votre rgion. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre test et garanti pour le produit, pour la tension et le type de courant inscrits sur l'tiquette des valeurs nominales lectriques du produit. Les valeurs nominales de tension et d'intensit du cordon doivent tre suprieures celles indiques sur l'ordinateur. En outre, le diamtre du cordon doit tre au minimum de 0,75 mm/18 AWG et sa longueur doit tre comprise entre 1,5 m (5 pieds) et 2 m (6.5 pieds). Si vous avez des questions sur le type de cordon d'alimentation utiliser, contactez votre fournisseur de service agr. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de sorte qu'il ne puisse pas tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise secteur et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier du portable. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP 18 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis de Macrovision Corporation Ce produit intgre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protge par des revendications de procd de certains brevets amricains et d'autres droits sur la proprit intellectuelle de Macrovision Corporation et d'autres bnficiaires de droits. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur doit tre autorise par Macrovision Corporation et a pour but de permettre un visionnage domestique et d'autres utilisations limites uniquement, sauf autorisation de Macrovision Corporation. L'ingnierie inverse et le dsassemblage sont interdits. Avis de Macrovision Corporation 19 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe en effet un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil, pour signaler une fuite de gaz, si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si cet appareil n'a pas t fourni avec un cordon tlphonique, n'utilisez qu'un cordon tlphonique No. 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez jamais un cordon de modem ou de tlphone dans la prise RJ-45 (rseau Ethernet). GARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunication du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas support, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. 20 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu'

ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Avis sur les modems 21 Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux normes techniques Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN donne une indication sur le nombre maximum de priphriques qu'il est possible de relier une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison de priphriques quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. Au Japon, la marque de certification pour le modem LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft est la suivante :

Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge par la ligne de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. 22 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. b. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. c. d. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Assistance vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence (111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique Ce manuel prsente les avis de rglementation relatifs aux fonctions avec et sans fil des diffrents pays et rgions, ainsi que des informations de conformit de l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Un ou plusieurs priphriques sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer dans les avions, dans les hpitaux, prs d'explosifs, dans des lieux dangereux, etc. Si vous n'tes pas sr des rgles qui s'appliquent ce produit, demandez si vous pouvez l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 23 Avis de la FCC Cet quipement a t test et trouv conforme aux limitations relatives aux appareils numriques de classe B, en accord avec l'article 15 des rgles de la FCC. Ces limitations sont conues pour offrir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie sous forme de radiofrquences. S'il n'est pas utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut produire des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Cependant, il n'existe aucune garantie assurant qu'il n'y aura pas d'interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si l'utilisateur constate des interfrences lors de la rception d'missions de radio ou de tlvision (il suffit pour le vrifier d'allumer et d'teindre successivement l'appareil), il devra prendre l'une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes pour les liminer savoir :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. Accrotre la distance entre le matriel et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique une prise d'un circuit autre que celui auquel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Modifications La FCC requiert que l'utilisateur soit averti que toute modification de cet quipement non approuve expressment pas la socit Hewlett-Packard pourrait annuler le droit de l'utilisateur d'utiliser l'quipement. Cbles Les cbles branchs cet quipement doivent tre blinds et comporter des protections de connecteur mtalliques de type RFI/EMI pour tre conformes aux directives et rglementations de la FCC. 24 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Dclaration de conformit pour les produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) Ce matriel est conforme l'alina 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est sous rserve des deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet quipement ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles et 2. Cet quipement doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences capables de causer un mauvais fonctionnement. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de votre produit, crivez-nous l'adresse :

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Si vous avez des questions au sujet de la dclaration FCC, crivez-nous l'adresse :

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Ou appelez-nous au (281) 514-3333. Pour identifier ce produit, communiquez la rfrence ou le numro de srie ou de modle figurant sur le produit. Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de rseau local sans fil. Ce priphrique ne doit pas tre situ au mme endroit ou fonctionner en mme temps qu'une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition des missions de radiofrquence La puissance de sortie mise par ce priphrique est infrieure aux limites de la FCC sur l'exposition des missions de radiofrquence. Nanmoins, le priphrique doit tre utilis de faon ce que les risques de contact physique soient rduits pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm

(8 pouces) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : Si vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, l'appareil ne doit tre utilis qu' l'intrieur d'un btiment, car il fonctionne dans une bande de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Il s'agit d'une rglementation de la FCC visant rduire le risque d'interfrences nuisibles aux systmes mobiles par satellite utilisant les mmes canaux. Les bandes de frquences allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont rserves aux stations radars trs puissantes. Celles-ci peuvent causer des interfrences et/ou endommager l'appareil. Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. AVERTISSEMENT ! Modems without integral RJ-11 that are shipped with this computer must be installed only in devices displaying the A-tick. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 25 Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. ATTENTION : A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Si cet appareil dispose d'une fonctionnalit WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS pour les appareil exempts de licence d'Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est sous rserve des deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interfrences et

(2) cet appareil doit tolrer toute interfrence, notamment les interfrences pouvant engendrer un mauvais fonctionnement de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm

(8 pouces) des antennes. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : En cas d'utilisation d'un rseau LAN IEEE 802.11a, ce produit doit uniquement tre utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment, en raison de son fonctionnement sur la plage de frquence de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment pour la plage de frquence allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz afin de rduire le risque d'interfrences prjudiciables pour les systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant le mme canal. Les plages de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont alloues prioritairement aux radars haute puissance. Ces stations radar peuvent provoquer des interfrences avec cet appareil ou l'endommager. L'antenne de cet appareil ne se remplace pas. Toute tentative de modification par l'utilisateur peut endommager l'ordinateur. Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive relative la basse tension 2006/95/CE Directive EMC 2004/108/CE Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE 26 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles La conformit CE de ce produit n'est valide que s'il est aliment par un adaptateur secteur estampill CE (le cas chant) et un cordon d'alimentation fournis par HP. Reportez-vous la section Cordons d'alimentation requis la page 39. La conformit ces directives implique la conformit aux normes europennes harmonises applicables (normes europennes) qui sont prsentes dans la dclaration de conformit de l'UE dicte par HP pour ce produit ou cette gamme de produits et disponibles soit dans la documentation du produit soit sur le site Web suivant : www.hp.eu/certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). La conformit est reprsente par la marque de conformit CE ci-aprs. Pour certains produits de tlcommunications, le numro 4 chiffres d'un organisme de certification peut tre ajout en suffixe. Reportez-vous l'tiquette de conformit appose sur le produit. La fonctionnalit de tlcommunications de ce produit peut tre utilise dans les pays de l'Union europenne et de l'AELE suivants : Allemagne, Autriche, Belgique, Bulgarie, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Estonie, Finlande, France, Grce, Hongrie, Irlande, Islande, Lettonie, Liechtenstein, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malte, Norvge, Pays-Bas, Pologne, Portugal, Rpublique tchque, Roumanie, Royaume-Uni, Slovaquie, Slovnie, Sude et Suisse. Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Allemagne. Produits quips de modules sans fil CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES INTERNATIONALES EN MATIRE D'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONNEMENTS DE FRQUENCE RADIO. Le module sans fil intgr votre ordinateur est un metteur et rcepteur radio. Cet appareil est conu pour ne pas dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dfinies par des directives internationales (ICNIRP). Ces limites sont dfinies dans le cadre de directives qui tablissent les niveaux autoriss de rayonnements de frquence radio pour l'ensemble de la population. Ces directives, dictes par des organismes scientifiques indpendants, s'appuient sur une valuation rgulire et minutieuse de diffrentes tudes scientifiques. Cet appareil est galement conforme aux directives R&TTE europennes relatives la protection de la sant et de la scurit des personnes. La norme d'exposition dfinie pour les appareils mobiles utilise une unit de mesure appele SAR

(Specific Absorption Rate, taux d'absorption spcifique).* Ce taux a t obtenu via des tests au cours desquels les appareils ont effectu des transmissions au niveau de puissance certifi le plus lev, dans toutes les bandes de frquence. Le taux SAR rel de l'appareil en cours de fonctionnement peut tre bien infrieur la valeur maximale dfinie, dans la mesure o il fonctionne diffrents niveaux de puissance et utilise uniquement la puissance requise pour atteindre le rseau. Install dans l'ordinateur, cet appareil est conforme aux directives en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio lorsque les antennes se trouvent une distance minimale du corps. Pour transmettre des donnes ou des messages, l'appareil doit disposer d'une connexion de qualit au rseau. Dans certains cas, les transmissions de donnes ou de messages peuvent tre retardes jusqu' ce qu'une connexion soit disponible. Veillez respecter la distance conseille jusqu' la fin de la transmission. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 27

*Les directives internationales autres que celles de la FCC indiquent que la limite SAR pour les appareils mobiles utiliss par le grand public est de 2 watts/kilogramme (W/kg), calcul sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de masse tissulaire. Ces directives incluent une marge de scurit importante pour une protection accrue du grand public et pour tenir compte des variations dans les mesures. Les valeurs SAR peuvent varier selon les exigences locales en matire de reporting et selon la bande du rseau. Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE (annexe II) sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts

(RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Un systme informatique compos de produits de marque HP est conforme aux exigences allemandes en matire d'ergonomie si tous les produits utiliss portent la marque d'homologation GS , par exemple l'ordinateur de bureau, le clavier, la souris et le moniteur. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Avis pour le Japon B VCCI-B 28 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 29 Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. Avis pour Tawan 30 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour viter tout risque de blessure associe la chaleur ou de surchauffe de l'ordinateur, ne placez pas ce dernier sur vos genoux et n'obstruez pas ses ouvertures d'aration. Utilisez toujours l'ordinateur sur une surface plane et rigide. La ventilation ne doit pas tre entrave par des lments rigides, tels qu'une imprimante, ni par des lments souples, tels que des coussins, du tissu ou un tapis pais. De mme, l'adaptateur secteur ne doit rester en contact ni avec la peau ni avec un lment souple, tel que des coussins, un vtement ou un tapis lorsque l'ordinateur est en cours de fonctionnement. L'ordinateur et l'adaptateur secteur sont conformes aux limites de temprature de surface accessible l'utilisateur, dfinies par la norme internationale sur la scurit du matriel informatique (CEI/EN 60950). Avis sur les risques lis la scurit Si vous observez l'une des situations suivantes (ou avez d'autres inquitudes en matire de scurit), n'utilisez pas l'ordinateur : bruit de crpitement, de sifflement ou de claquement ou forte odeur/fume en provenance de l'ordinateur. La survenue de l'une de ces situations est normale en cas de dfaillance d'un composant lectronique interne de manire neutralise et contrle. Cependant, ces situations peuvent galement indiquer un risque de scurit. Ne partez pas du principe qu'il s'agit d'une dfaillance neutralise. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension, dconnectez-le de sa source d'alimentation, puis contactez le support technique. Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur 31 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur AVERTISSEMENT !

batterie d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie ou de brlures, abstenez-vous de dmonter, d'craser, de perforer, de jeter dans l'eau ou dans le feu une batterie, ou encore de court-circuiter ses connecteurs externes. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne laissez pas les batteries la porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, n'utilisez que la batterie fournie avec l'ordinateur, une batterie de remplacement fournie par HP ou une batterie compatible achete comme accessoire auprs de HP. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT ! L'coute prolonge de musique un volume lev peut endommager votre acuit auditive. Pour rduire le risque de diminution de l'acuit auditive, baissez le volume un niveau modr et agrable et minimisez le temps d'coute des volumes levs. Pour votre scurit, rinitialisez toujours le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des couteurs. Le volume sonore de certains de ces appareils peut tre plus lev que d'autres, mme si le rglage est identique. Toute modification des paramtres audio ou d'galisation par dfaut peut entraner une augmentation du volume et doit tre effectue avec prcaution. Pour votre scurit, utilisez uniquement des casques ou des couteurs respectant les limites dfinies par la norme EN 50332-2. Si l'ordinateur comporte un casque ou des couteurs, cette combinaison respecte la norme EN 50332-1. 32 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques d'lectrocution ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur

(plutt que de l'ordinateur). Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les problmes de scurit potentiels, n'utilisez avec cet ordinateur que l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'ordinateur, un adaptateur secteur de remplacement fourni par HP ou un adaptateur secteur achet comme accessoire auprs de HP. Nettoyage du clavier AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques d'lectrocution ou de dtrioration des composants internes, n'utilisez pas d'aspirateur pour nettoyer le clavier. Un aspirateur peut dposer de la poussire sur la surface du clavier. Nettoyez rgulirement le clavier pour viter que les touches ne deviennent collantes et pour liminer la poussire, les peluches et les particules qui risquent de se loger sous les touches. Utilisez une bombe dpoussirante air comprim avec embout directionnel permettant d'insuffler de l'air sous le clavier et autour des touches pour retirer les particules. Avis sur les dplacements AVERTISSEMENT ! Afin de rduire le risque de choc lectrique, d'incendie ou de dtrioration du matriel, n'essayez pas d'alimenter l'ordinateur au moyen d'un kit de conversion de tension destin aux quipements mnagers. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 33 Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude 2000m ou 2000 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Norvge et Sude : notice de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ATTENTION : Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, utilisez un isolant voltaque lors de la connexion un systme de distribution par cble. 34 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Informations importantes relatives la scurit AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Afin d'viter tout risque de choc lectrique ou de dommages votre quipement :

Ne dsactivez pas la prise de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation. La prise de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise mise la terre facilement accessible. Coupez l'alimentation du client lger en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. L'ordinateur peut tre trs lourd ; assurez-vous d'adopter une position ergonomique adquate lors de sa manipulation. Installez l'ordinateur proximit d'une prise secteur. Le cordon d'alimentation secteur constitue le principal dispositif de dconnexion secteur de votre ordinateur et doit donc tre facilement accessible. Pour votre scurit, le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec votre ordinateur est quip d'une broche de mise la terre. Utilisez toujours le cordon d'alimentation avec une prise murale correctement relie la terre, afin de rduire les risques d'lectrocution. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique en provenance du rseau tlphonique, branchez votre ordinateur dans une prise secteur avant de le connecter une ligne tlphonique. Par ailleurs, dconnectez votre ligne tlphonique avant de dbrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur. Dbranchez le cordon du modem du rseau tlphonique avant d'installer ou d'enlever le capot de votre ordinateur. N'utilisez pas l'ordinateur lorsque le capot est enlev. Pour plus de scurit, dbranchez toujours l'ordinateur de sa source d'alimentation, de tout systme de tlcommunications (comme les lignes tlphoniques), des rseaux et des modems avant d'excuter toute opration de maintenance. Si vous ne respectez pas ces consignes, vous risquez de vous blesser ou de causer des dommages matriels. Le modem et l'alimentation de ce produit renferment des niveaux de tension dangereux. Informations importantes relatives la scurit 35 ATTENTION : Si votre ordinateur est quip d'un commutateur de slection de tension destin aux systmes fonctionnant sous 115 ou 230 V, ce commutateur a t prdfini sur la tension en vigueur dans le pays/rgion o il a t vendu initialement. Mettre le commutateur sur la mauvaise position peut endommager l'ordinateur et annuler toute garantie implicite. Ce produit n'a pas t valu pour une connexion un systme d'alimentation informatique (un systme de distribution de courant alternatif sans connexion directe la terre, selon la norme CEI/EN 60950). Conditions d'installation Consultez les instructions d'installation avant de brancher cet quipement l'alimentation. AVERTISSEMENT ! L'quipement doit tre pourvu d'un raccordement la terre protecteur secteur appropri. Cet ordinateur peut contenir des pices sous tension et amovibles. Dbranchez le cordon d'alimentation avant de retirer le botier. Remettez le botier bien en place avant de remettre l'ordinateur sous tension. Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie AVERTISSEMENT ! Le produit peut contenir une pile ou un module de batterie interne alcalin, au dioxyde de lithium manganse ou au pentoxyde de vanadium. Il y a danger d'incendie et de brlures s'il n'est pas manipul correctement. Pour rduire les risques de blessure :

N'essayez pas de recharger la batterie. vitez de la soumettre des tempratures suprieures 60 C (140 F). N'essayez pas de dmonter, d'craser, de percer la batterie, ni de court-circuiter ses bornes ou de la jeter dans le feu ou l'eau. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Remplacez uniquement par une batterie HP prvue pour ce produit. Pour plus d'informations sur le retrait d'une batterie, reportez-vous la documentation de l'ordinateur. Les piles, modules de batterie et accumulateurs ne doivent pas tre jets avec les ordures mnagres. Pour permettre leur recyclage ou leur mise au rebut, veuillez utiliser les systmes de collecte publique ou renvoyez-les HP, un partenaire HP agr ou leurs agents. Taiwan EPA demande aux fabricants ou aux importateurs de piles, conformment l'Article 15 de la loi relative la mise au rebut (Waste Disposal Act), d'indiquer les mentions de rcupration des piles usages dans des points de vente, brochures ou publicits. Contactez une entreprise de recyclage qualifie pour la mise au rebut approprie de la pile. 36 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT ! L'coute prolonge de musique un volume lev peut endommager votre acuit auditive. Pour rduire le risque de diminution de l'acuit auditive, baissez le volume un niveau modr et agrable et minimisez le temps d'coute des volumes levs. Pour votre scurit, rinitialisez toujours le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des couteurs. Le volume sonore de certains de ces appareils peut tre plus lev que d'autres, mme si le rglage est identique. Toute modification des paramtres audio ou d'galisation par dfaut peut entraner une augmentation du volume et doit tre effectue avec prcaution. Si l'ordinateur est quip d'un casque d'coute ou d'couteurs et qu'il porte le sigle GS , cette combinaison est en conformit avec la norme EN 50332-1. Pour votre propre scurit, les casques d'coute ou les couteurs utiliss avec ces produits doivent tre en conformit avec les limitations des casques de la norme EN 50332-2. Informations de scurit relatives au laser Pour les produits quips d'units optiques ou d'metteurs fibre optique. Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de stockage optique (c'est--dire un lecteur CD ou DVD) et/ou d'un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Ces lments comportent des lasers classs dans la catgorie des produits laser de classe 1, conformment la norme IEC/EN 60825-1, et sont conformes ses exigences. Chacun de ces produits laser est conforme aux rgulations 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 de la US FDA ou est conforme ces normes l'exception des diffrences conformment la notice des lasers No. 50, du 24 Juin 2007. AVERTISSEMENT ! L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation des appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de pice rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, autres que ceux indiqus dans le prsent manuel. Seuls les techniciens agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 Pour tre protg contre les courants de dfaut, l'quipement doit tre raccord une borne de terre. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur disposant d'une mise la terre raccorde la terre. Les cordons d'alimentation de remplacement ne fournissent pas une protection adquate contre les dfauts. Utilisez exclusivement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit ou un cordon de remplacement agr par Hewlett-Packard. Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs 37 Danemark For tilslutning af de vrige ledere, se medflgende installationsvejledning. Finlande Laite on liitettv suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Norvge Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Sude Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag, nr den ansluts till ett ntverk. Exigences relatives l'alimentation Les alimentations sur certains produits sont quipes de commutateurs de tension externes. La fonction de slection de tension sur le produit autorise son fonctionnement sous toute tension comprise entre 100-127 ou 200-240 volts secteur. Les alimentations sur les produits dpourvus de commutateurs de tension externes sont quipes de circuits internes qui dtectent la tension d'entre et basculent automatiquement sur la tension approprie. Pour des raisons de scurit, n'utilisez que l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'quipement ou un adaptateur de remplacement autoris par Hewlett-Packard. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Pour une utilisation en Norvge Ce produit est galement conu pour un systme lectrique informatique avec tension phase-phase de 230 V. 38 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Cordons d'alimentation requis Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit est conforme aux rglementations en vigueur dans le pays o le matriel a t achet l'origine. N'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'quipement ou un cordon d'alimentation de remplacement de Hewlett-Packard ou d'une source HP agre. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/

hpsupport/index.pl. Les cordons d'alimentation destins tre utiliss dans d'autres pays doivent respecter les normes du pays o vous utilisez le produit. Pour plus d'informations sur les exigences de cordon d'alimentation, contactez votre revendeur, votre mainteneur ou votre fournisseur de services agr HP. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas de cordons d'alimentation d'autres produits. Un mauvais cordon d'alimentation peut entraner un risque de dcharge lectrique ou d'incendie. Les exigences prsentes ci-aprs s'appliquent tous les pays. 1. 2. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre homologu par une agence accrdite, responsable de l'valuation dans le pays o le cordon sera install. La longueur du cordon doit tre comprise entre 1,8 m (6 pieds) and 3,6 m (12 pieds). Pour un cordon d'alimentation de 2 m (6,56 pieds) ou moins, le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 0,75 mm2 ou 18 AWG. Si le cordon d'alimentation dpasse 2 m (6,56 pieds), le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 1 mm2 ou 16 AWG. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre branch un endroit dgag o il ne risque pas d'tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise murale et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas ce produit avec un cordon d'alimentation endommag. Si le cordon d'alimentation est endommag de quelque manire que ce soit, remplacez-le immdiatement. Un cordon endommag peut entraner des risques de blessure. Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon Pour une utilisation au Japon, utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'appareil. ATTENTION : N'utilisez pas le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit pour alimenter d'autres appareils. Risque de pincement AVERTISSEMENT ! Observez les zones risque de pincement. N'approchez pas vos doigts des pices se refermant. Risque de pincement 39 Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude 2000m ou 2000 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales 40 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne Le niveau de pression acoustique (LpA) est nettement en dessous de 70 dB(A) (position oprateur, fonctionnement normal, selon ISO 7779). Les donnes d'mission de bruit acoustique sont disponibles dans les dclarations IT ECO relatives au produit, l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne 41 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler l'quipement lectronique usag, les cartouches d'impression HP d'origine et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP : http://www.hp.com/recycle. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits conformment aux dispositions lgales telles que REACH (rglement CE numro 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Un rapport d'informations sur la conformit des substances chimiques de ce produit est disponible l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/reach. 42 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

( http://www. sepa.gov.cn) Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) Tableau des substances/composants toxiques et dangereux et leur contenu conformment aux mthodes de gestion du contrle de la pollution par les produits d'informations lectroniques de Chine Substances et composants toxiques et dangereux Nom de la pice Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Batterie Cbles Camra Chssis/Autre Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Disque dur Casque Cartes PCA d'entre/

sortie Clavier cran LCD X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine 43 Substances et composants toxiques et dangereux Nom de la pice Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Tlcommande Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java Haut-parleurs externes Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O : Indique que la quantit de substance toxique ou dangereuse contenue dans tous les matriaux homognes de cette pice se situe en dessous de la limite fixe par la norme SJ/T11363-2006. X : Indique que cette substance toxique ou dangereuse contenue dans au moins un matriel homogne utilis dans ce composant est au-dessus de la limite dans SJ/T11363-2006. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la directive europenne 2002/95/EC du 27 janvier 2003, dite RoHS (Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'environnement relative aux dchets d'quipements lectriques et lectroniques) et ses amendements. REMARQUE : La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. 44 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T11363-2006 X SJ/T11363-2006 X RoHS 2003 1 27 2002/95/EC

:

Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) 45 Dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon Une norme japonaise, dfinie par la spcification JIS C 0950, 2008, oblige les fabricants fournir des dclarations de contenu de matriel pour certaines catgories de produits lectroniques proposes la vente aprs le 1 juillet 2006. Pour afficher la dclaration de matriel JIS C 0950 de ce produit, rendez-vous sur le site Web HP : http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie Ce produit a t tiquet conformment la loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie exigeant la divulgation de la consommation nergtique en utilisation normale (mode inactif) et en mode veille. Votre produit correspond l'une des nombreuses configurations de cette famille de modle ; la consommation nergtique du mode inactif de votre configuration spcifique peut tre diffrente des informations figurant sur l'tiquette. La consommation nergtique relle de votre produit peut tre suprieure ou infrieure la valeur signale sur l'tiquette de l'nergie du produit au Mexique en raison de facteurs tels que la configuration (composants et modules choisis) et de l'utilisation (tches ralises, logiciels installs et excuts, etc.). Rglementation EEE de la Turquie En conformit avec la rglementation EEE EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine L'quipement est conforme aux exigences relatives aux rglementations techniques, approuves par la rsolution du Cabinet des ministres de l'Ukraine date du 3 dcembre 2008 1057, en termes de restrictions quant l'utilisation de certaines substances dangereuses dans les quipements lectroniques et lectriques.

, 3 2008 1057. Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire Voir http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel ou la pile bouton de ce produit est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. 46 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries Hewlett-Packard encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, les cartouches d'impression de marque HP et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour obtenir des informations concernant le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Conformit ENERGY STAR (certains modles) REMARQUE : Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo Energy Star. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, Hewlett-Packard Company a suivi pour le produit le processus de qualification et de certification renforc labor de l'agence amricaine pour la protection de l'environnement afin de s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR sont agrs ENERGY STAR conformment aux lignes directrices d'ENERGY STAR en matire d'utilisation efficace de l'nergie. Le logo suivant est prsent sur tous les ordinateurs qualifis ENERGY STAR. Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries 47 Le programme ENERGY STAR pour ordinateurs a t cr par l'EPA pour promouvoir l'conomie d'nergie et rduire la pollution de l'air grce des quipements plus conergtiques au sein des maisons, bureaux et usines. Une des faons de rendre les produits plus efficaces sur le plan nergtique consiste rduire la consommation lorsqu'elle n'est pas gre par la fonction Gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Windows. La fonction de gestion de l'alimentation permet la mise en veille de l'ordinateur aprs une priode d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. Lorsqu'elle est utilise avec un moniteur ENERGY STAR, cette fonction prend galement en charge les fonctions similaires de gestion de l'alimentation du moniteur externe. Afin de bnficier de cette conomie d'nergie, la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation a t prdfinie pour une mise en veille de l'ordinateur et du moniteur aprs une certaine priode d'inactivit :

Ordinateur Moniteur/cran intgr Ordinateurs de bureau et postes de travail Aprs 30 minutes Aprs 15 minutes Clients lgers et ordinateurs de bureau Sans objet Aprs 15 minutes Il suffit que l'utilisateur se serve d'un des priphriques d'entre de l'ordinateur (ex. : souris, clavier, etc.) pour que l'ordinateur et l'cran quittent le mode veille et se rallument. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN d'veil par appel rseau est active, il est galement possible de rallumer l'ordinateur l'aide d'un signal rseau. Pour plus d'informations sur le potentiel d'conomie nergtique et financire de la fonction Gestion de l'alimentation, reportez-vous au site Web consacr la gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA : http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Pour plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses bienfaits sur l'environnement, reportez-vous au site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA : http://www.energystar.gov. ATTENTION : L'utilisation de la fonction d'conomie d'nergie du moniteur avec des moniteurs qui ne sont pas qualifis ENERGY STAR peut entraner une distorsion de l'image en cas de fermeture automatique pour conomie d'nergie. REMARQUE : ENERGY STAR n'est pas pris en charge sur les ordinateurs de bureau et les postes de travail configurs avec certaines versions de Linux ou FreeDOS. En cas de restauration du systme d'exploitation, vous devrez galement redfinir les paramtres ENERGY STAR (le cas chant) une fois la restauration effectue. Sous Windows 7, pour contrler les paramtres d'alimentation par dfaut de votre ordinateur de bureau ou station de travail, slectionnez Dmarrer > Panneau de configuration, puis tapez Options d'alimentation dans la fentre de recherche. 48 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Sous Windows 8, pour contrler les paramtres d'alimentation par dfaut de votre ordinateur de bureau ou station de travail, tapez alimentation dans l'cran d'accueil, slectionnez Paramtres, puis slectionnez Options d'alimentation dans la liste des applications. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits, conformment aux normes juridiques en vigueur telles que le rglement concernant l'enregistrement, l'valuation et l'autorisation des substances chimiques, ainsi que les restrictions applicables ces substances (REACH, rglement CE N 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ce produit sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur le mercure Ce produit HP peut contenir les matriaux suivants qui requirent un traitement spcial la fin de leur cycle de vie :

Le mercure contenu dans la lampe fluorescente de l'cran cristaux liquides (LCD) Il se peut que l'limination du mercure soit rglemente en raison de considrations environnementales. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'limination et le traitement de cette substance, veuillez contacter les autorits locales concernes ou l'Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. Reportez-

vous au site http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) Substances chimiques 49

(cid:7481)(cid:8706)(cid:7481)(cid:4579)(cid:10393)(cid:17240)(cid:2748)(cid:1907)(cid:13136)(cid:2554)(cid:1958)(cid:2651)(cid:18431)(cid:16024)

(cid:7785)(cid:6558)(cid:1117)(cid:3373)(cid:11444)(cid:457)(cid:11109)(cid:4480)(cid:1553)(cid:5791)(cid:1239)(cid:2801)(cid:8849)(cid:7683)(cid:6615)(cid:2150)(cid:12753)(cid:10806)(cid:2254)(cid:8965)(cid:458)

(cid:1137)(cid:7605)(cid:3)(cid:3898)(cid:10812)(cid:3230)(cid:2754)

(cid:7065)(cid:10019)(cid:3230)

(cid:1979)(cid:4494)(cid:7575) I/O PCAs

(cid:11115)(cid:9414)

(cid:19300)(cid:11534)

(cid:21846)(cid:7741)

(cid:7536)(cid:12775)(cid:18)(cid:1964)(cid:1292)

(cid:20228)(cid:6269)

(cid:1979)(cid:18206)(cid:18)(cid:3916)(cid:18206)(cid:4296)(cid:1417)

(cid:19515)(cid:16945)(cid:16884)(cid:3901)

(cid:3916)(cid:18206)(cid:6621)(cid:2156)(cid:16884)(cid:3901)

(cid:11115)(cid:13628)

(cid:11938)(cid:11534)(cid:20647)(cid:2270)(cid:3230)

(cid:7284)(cid:12144)(cid:4741) O: (cid:16030)(cid:12144)(cid:16923)(cid:7487)(cid:8712)(cid:7487)(cid:4585)(cid:10399)(cid:17246)(cid:3422)(cid:16923)(cid:18206)(cid:1324)(cid:6262)(cid:7487)(cid:3453)(cid:17246)(cid:7558)(cid:7119)(cid:1123)(cid:11450)(cid:2657)(cid:18437)(cid:3453)(cid:3422)SJ/T11363-2006(cid:3)

(cid:7741)(cid:2044)(cid:16378)(cid:4560)(cid:11450)(cid:19590)(cid:18437)(cid:16311)(cid:8824)(cid:1307)(cid:1089)(cid:574) X: (cid:16030)(cid:12144)(cid:16923)(cid:7487)(cid:8712)(cid:7487)(cid:4585)(cid:10399)(cid:17246)(cid:14377)(cid:4679)(cid:3422)(cid:16923)(cid:18206)(cid:1324)(cid:11450)(cid:7686)(cid:1078)(cid:3453)(cid:17246)(cid:7558)(cid:7119)(cid:1123)(cid:11450)(cid:2657)(cid:18437)(cid:17339)(cid:2096) SJ/T11363-2006(cid:3)(cid:7741)(cid:2044)(cid:16378)(cid:4560)(cid:11450)(cid:19590)(cid:18437)(cid:16311)(cid:8824)(cid:574)

(cid:16030)(cid:1123)(cid:7741)(cid:7487)(cid:263)X(cid:264)(cid:3)(cid:11450)(cid:6262)(cid:7487)(cid:18206)(cid:1324)(cid:18227)(cid:12636)(cid:2622)(cid:8541)(cid:11541)RoHS(cid:8971)(cid:16378)(cid:15)(cid:263)(cid:8541)(cid:9064)(cid:16868)(cid:1360)(cid:2754)(cid:8541)(cid:11541)(cid:10812)(cid:1217)(cid:1360) 2003(cid:5290)1(cid:7486)27(cid:7195)(cid:1961)(cid:1220)(cid:11115)(cid:4486)(cid:11115)(cid:3230)(cid:16884)(cid:3901)(cid:1123)(cid:19590)(cid:2156)(cid:1461)(cid:11102)(cid:7686)(cid:1233)(cid:7487)(cid:4585)(cid:10399)(cid:17246)(cid:11450)2002/95/EC

(cid:2605)(cid:6461)(cid:1306)(cid:264)(cid:574)

(cid:8990)(cid:966)(cid:10725)(cid:1555)(cid:1461)(cid:11102)(cid:7509)(cid:19590)(cid:11450)(cid:2552)(cid:13881)(cid:7741)(cid:16892)(cid:2572)(cid:2025)(cid:1220)(cid:1245)(cid:2807)(cid:8601)(cid:5230)(cid:5147)(cid:1426)(cid:11450)(cid:9311)(cid:5340)(cid:2754)(cid:9397)(cid:5340)(cid:12671)(cid:7575)(cid:1324)(cid:574) The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 50 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Tableau 6-1 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink X Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. REMARQUE : The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. Dclarations IT ECO Ordinateurs de bureau et clients lgers http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Stations de travail http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Dclarations IT ECO 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal

(modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). REMARQUE : Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). REMARQUE : Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Rglementation EEE de la Turquie Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 52 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine)

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine) 53 Index A avis utilisation en vol 12 voyage 33 avis sur la mise au rebut des quipements 42 avis, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail avis sur la scurit des lasers 13 avis sur le niveau du volume, FCC (Federal Communications casque et couteurs 32 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 11 batterie 12, 46 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 32 Brsil 5 Canada 5 clavier 33 cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon 18 cordons d'alimentation 18, 33 Core du Sud 10 environnement 42 ergonomie 8, 28 Japon 9 Macrovision Corporation 19 matriau compos de perchlorate 46 Mexique 10 mise au rebut des quipements 42 modem 14 niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 32 restriction d'utilisation de Commission) 24 avis, ordinateurs portables FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 3 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine 43, 49 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour le Japon 52 avis de certification GS 8, 28 avis de restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 46 avis pour l'Union europenne 6, 26 avis pour la Core du Sud 10 avis pour le Brsil 5 avis pour le Canada 5 avis pour le Japon 9 avis pour Macrovision Corporation 19 substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 46 avis relatif au clavier 33 avis relatif aux appareils sans fil restriction d'utilisation de pour le Mexique 10 substances dangereuses pour la Chine 43, 49 avis sur l'altitude 34, 40 avis sur l'environnement pour la restriction d'utilisation de Chine 43 substances dangereuses pour le Japon 52 avis sur l'ergonomie 8, 28 avis sur la mise au rebut scurit des lasers 13 Singapour 11 Tawan 11 Union europenne 6, 26 batterie 46 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 12 quipement 42 avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 32 avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour 11 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 11 avis sur les conditions d'utilisation 42 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 18, 33 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon 18 avis sur les dplacements 33 avis sur les modems 14 Canada 17 Japon 17 Nouvelle-Zlande 17 systme amricain 14 avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande 17 avis sur les modems pour le avis sur les modems pour le Canada 17 Japon 17 avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis 14 avis sur les utilisations en vol 12 avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales 34, 40 avis tawanais 11 B batterie, avis 12, 32, 46 54 Index C conformit ENERGY STAR 12 D dclaration de conformit ordinateurs portables 4 dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon 46 F FCC (Federal Communications Commission) avis sur les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 avis sur les ordinateurs portables 3 cble des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 cbles pour ordinateurs portables 3 modifications apportes aux ordinateurs portables 3 modifications des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 L loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie 46 M matriel lectronique et de la batterie, recyclage 42 modifications, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 24 N notice de mise la terre des cbles 34 notices restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 53 O ordinateurs portables, modifications FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 3 P priphrique matriel, identification 1 priphriques de rseau local sans fil 25 priphriques LAN sans fil 26 priphriques WLAN 4 R recyclage de la batterie 42 recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie 42 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 53 S support vocal 18 T tuner TV, notice de mise la terre des cbles 34 Index 55

Lenovo IdeaPad U510 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.1_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Note Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (July 2012) Copyright Lenovo 2012. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer .......................................... 1 Top view.......................................................................................................................1 Left-side view ..............................................................................................................3 Right-side view............................................................................................................4 Front view ....................................................................................................................5 Bottom view .................................................................................................................6 Chapter 2. Learning the basics.............................................................. 7 First use.........................................................................................................................7 Using AC adapter and battery ..................................................................................9 Using the touchpad...................................................................................................10 Using the keyboard...................................................................................................11 Connecting external devices....................................................................................14 Special keys and buttons..........................................................................................17 System status indicators...........................................................................................18 Securing your computer...........................................................................................20 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet................................................. 21 Wired connection ......................................................................................................21 Wireless connection ..................................................................................................23 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system..................................................... 24 OneKey Rescue system ............................................................................................24 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting ................................................................. 27 Frequently asked questions .....................................................................................27 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................29 Trademarks............................................................................................ 34 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f g Note: The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product.



Attention:

Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged.

The parts bounded by dashed lines are internally installed. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a b c d e Integrated camera Computer display The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant Use the camera for video communication. Wireless module antennas visual output. The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. f Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 10. g Speakers The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f g h a OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to start the OneKey Rescue system when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 24. b Fan louvers Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the computer may occur. c RJ-45 port This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 21. Display port Connects to external display devices. HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. d e f USB port Connect to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. g Combo audio jack Connects to headphones or headsets. The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. Note: Recording may not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. h Built-in microphone The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d a USB port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. b Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 14. c d Optical drive Reads/Burns optical disks. AC power adapter jack Connect the AC adapter here. Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 9. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Front view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a a System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a a Louvers Allow air to enter the computer for cooling. 6 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer.

Conncting to the power The built-in battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.

Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer.

Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below.

Accepting the end user license agreement

Configuring the Internet connection

Registering the operating system

Creating a user account 7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, click menu. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is and select Sleep from the Start in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following.

Press the power button.

Press any key on the keyboard.

Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click menu. and select Shut down from the Start 8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:

The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work.

The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display.

Charging the battery If the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:

If the battery status indicator starts blinking

If the battery has not been used for a long time Note:

To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged.

Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C).

Full charge or discharge is not required.

Battery Protection If the battery pack remains idle for a long time, the battery may be over-discharged, and its degradation speed may be increased. The battery pack of IdeaPad U series uses the battery protection technology. When your computer remains idle for a long time, the battery pack enters the sleep mode to avoid over-discharge. After the battery pack enters the sleep mode, you cannot turn the computer on without using the power adapter. Please connect the power adapter to the computer to activate the battery pack. Note: The batter pack is in the sleep mode by default. When you use the computer for the first time, please plug the power adapter into it. Otherwise, the computer cannot be turned on. 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the touchpad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

d a a Touchpad b Left-click area c Right-click area b c To move the cursor on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the cursor to move. The function corresponds to that of the left mouse button on a conventional mouse, which can be implemented by clicking this area. The function corresponds to that of the right mouse button on a conventional mouse, which can be implemented by clicking this area. Note: You can enable/disable the touchpad by pressing d

. 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the keyboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Your computer has function keys incorporated in its standard keyboard.

Function key combinations By pressing the appropriate function keys, you can change system settings instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn

, then press one of the function keys a

. b a Fn + End:

Fn + PgUp:

Fn + PgDn:

The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + Home:

Activate the pause function. Activate the break function. Enable/Disable the scroll lock. Activate the insert function. b 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Hotkeys Using hotkeys The hotkeys are located in the function key row of the keyboard. By pressing the appropriate hotkey, you can change system settings instantly. The following describes the function of each hotkey.

: Mute/Unmute.

: Increase sound volume.

: Refresh desktop or Web pages. Open the interface for integrated wireless devices settings (on/off).

:

: Decrease sound volume.

: Close active window or program.

: Enable/Disable the touchpad.

: Enable/Disable the built-in microphone.

: Turn on/off the integrated camera.

: Open the interface for changing display devices.

: Decrease display brightness.

: Increase display brightness. 12 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Setting hotkey mode By default, the hotkey functions are accessible by pressing the appropriate hotkey. However, you can disable the hotkey mode in the BIOS setup utility. To disable the hotkey mode:

1 Restart the computer. When the Lenovo logo appears, immediately press Fn + F2 to enter the BIOS setup utility. 2 In the BIOS setup utility, open the Configuration menu, and change the setting of HotKey Switch from Hotkey Mode to Legacy Mode. 3 Open the Exit menu, and select Exit Saving Changes. Note: When hotkey mode is disabled, press the Fn key and the appropriate hotkey to access the corresponding hotkey function. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities.

Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Note:

This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 14 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug

(Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver is installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after connecting it, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data by that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area of Windows to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Connecting Bluetooth enabled device (on select models) If your computer has an integrated Bluetooth adapter card, it can connect to and transfer data wirelessly to other Bluetooth enabled devices, such as notebook computers, PDAs and cell phones. You can transfer data between these devices without cables and up to 10 meters range in open space. Note: The actual maximum range may vary due to interference and transmission barriers. To get the best possible connection speed, place the device as near your computer as possible. Enabling Bluetooth communications on your computer Press to make configuration. Note:

When you do not need to use the Bluetooth function, turn it off to save battery power.

You need to pair the Bluetooth enabled device with your computer before you can transfer data between them. Read the documentation supplied with the Bluetooth enabled device for details on how to pair the device with your computer. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Special keys and buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a

OneKey Rescue system button a

When the computer is powered off, press this button to start the OneKey Rescue system.

In the Windows operating system, press this button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 24. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics System status indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

These indicators inform you of the computer status. a b a b Power status indicator Battery status indicator 18 No. Symbol Indicator a b Power Battery Chapter 2. Learning the basics Indicator status On (solid white) Blinking Off On (solid white) Solid amber Fast blinking amber Slow blinking amber Slow blinking white Off Meaning The computer is powered on. The computer is in sleep mode. The computer is powered off. The battery has more than 20% charge. The battery has between 5%

and 20% charge. The battery has less than 5%

charge. The battery is being charged. When battery charge reaches 20%, the blinking color changes to white. The battery has between 20%

and 80% charge and is still charging. When the battery reaches 80% charge the light will stop blinking, but charging will continue until the battery is fully charged. The battery is detached. 19 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.

Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press Fn + F2 (when HotKey Switch is set to Hotkey Mode) or F2 (when HotKey Switch is set to Legacy Mode) when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. 20 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following way:

Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-

speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines. DSL

Hardware connection Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *

*

Splitter *

Cable modem *

DSL modem *

*

*

* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary.

*

21 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet

Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 22 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-

speed broadband access without the need for cables. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods.

Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX (on select models) Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:

Press Hardware connection to make configuration. Wi-Fi/WiMAX network Access point *

* Not supplied Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 23 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use application that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system. Attention:



In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software).

Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Note:

The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer.

After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order.

Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs;

however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recovery. 24 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system

Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system.

Shut down your computer.

Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature.

Creating a recovery disc(s) Your computer does not ship with a recovery disc. You can use Lenovo OneKey Recovery system to create a recovery disc(s), which can be used to start and restore your computer in case of a system failure. To create a recovery disc(s):

Insert a recordable disc into the optical drive on your computer. Note: If your computer does not come with an integrated optical drive or if the integrated optical drive does not support disc creating, connect an appropriate external optical drive to your computer.

In Windows, press the OneKey Rescue system button to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery system.

On the main screen, click Create Recovery Disc.

Choose the type of recovery disc(s). You can create three types of recovery disc(s): recovery disc(s) with existing backup image, recovery disc(s) from the current system partition, and factory default recovery disc(s). Select the type of recovery disc you want to create and follow the on-screen instructions. 25 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system

Insert additional recordable disc(s) when prompted. Note:

The estimated number of discs needed will be displayed before the process of creating the recovery disc(s) begins. To minimize the number of discs needed, use recordable DVDs as the media. Also make sure your optical drive is compatible with the disc intended for use.

After recovery disc creation, number the discs appropriately for use in their correct order. The first disc created will be used to start the computer in the case of a system failure. 26 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions and tells where you can find detailed answers. What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

See Chapter 1. Important safety information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. How can I prevent problems with my computer?

See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. What are the main hardware features of my computer?

More information can be found in Chapter 1 and 2. Where can I find the detailed specifications for my computer?

See http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with a recovery disc. For an explanation of the alternative recovery methods offered by Lenovo, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 24. Where are the installation discs for pre-installed software?

Your computer does not come with installation discs for the pre-installed software. Installation programs for the pre-installed software on your computer can be downloaded from Lenovos consumer support Web site

(http://consumersupport.lenovo.com). If your computer is pre-installed with Windows operating system, you can also find installation programs for some pre-installed software in the Application folder on D partition of the hard disk drive. How can I contact the customer support center?

See Chapter 3. Getting help and service of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 27 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. Where can I find the device drivers?

A compatible device driver is a requirement to ensure correct operation and performance of each component in your computer. All the device drivers for your computer model can be downloaded from Lenovos consumer support Web site. If your computer is pre-installed with Windows operating system, you can also find device drivers for the operating system in the Driver folder on D partition of the hard disk drive. Lenovos consumer support Web site contains the most updated device drivers. What can I do if the backup process fails?

If you can start the backup feature without a problem, but it fails during the backup process, please try the following steps:

1 Close other programs, then restart the backup process. 2 Check if the destination media is damaged, try to select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to the factory status?

You can use this feature when your system fails or you need to re-install your operating system. This will restore your computer back to the initial status when you first booted up your computer after receiving it from the store. If there is critical data on your current partition, back it up before you run this recovery feature. 28 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 2. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 2. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on.

If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The AC adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.) If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced.

Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to the original factory contents using OneKey Rescue system. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced.

Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to exit from the screen saver or to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:

- Touch the touchpad.

- Press any key on the keyboard.

- Press the power button. 29 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Password problems I forgot my password.

If you forget your user password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password changed. If you forget your HDD password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forget your administrator password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on self-test (POST).

The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one.

Make sure that:

- The battery is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 30 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode and the computer does not work.

If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press any key or the power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press the power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC adapter. Computer screen problems The screen is blank.

Do the following:

- If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press to make the screen brighter.

- If the power indicator is in blinking, press the power button to resume from the sleep mode.

- If the problem persist, follow the solution in the following problem The screen is unreadable or distorted. The screen is unreadable or distorted.

Make sure that:

- The display device driver is installed correctly.

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. Incorrect characters appear on the screen.

Did you install the operating system or programs correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. 31 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the volume is turned up. Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indi-

cator shows empty.

Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The headphone jack is not used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device.

Discharge and recharge the battery. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery.

The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work. A startup problem The Microsoft Windows operating system does not start.

In the Boot menu in BIOS setup utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot Priority Order correctly.

Use the OneKey Rescue system to help solve or identify your problem. For details about OneKey Rescue system, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 24. 32 Other problems Your computer does not respond. The computer does not start from a device you want. The connected external device does not work. Chapter 5. Troubleshooting

To turn off your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC adapter.

Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network.

See the Boot menu of the BIOS setup utility. Make sure that the Boot Priority Order in the BIOS setup utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want.

Also make sure that the device from which the computer starts is enabled. In the Boot menu in the BIOS setup utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot Priority Order list.

Press Fn + F12 (when HotKey Switch is set to Hotkey Mode) or F12 (when HotKey Switch is set to Legacy Mode) when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up to select the device you want the computer starts from.

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer.

When using a high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or system shut down may result. 33 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 34 Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (March 2011) Copyright Lenovo 2011. LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights to use, reproduction and disclosure. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Lenovo IdeaPad U310/U410 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.1_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer.

Atheros Modular Certification Instructions to OEM Integrators FCC ID: PPD-AR5B125 March 2, 2011 Page 1 of 1 20002009 by Atheros Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Atheros, Atheros Driven, Atheros XR, Driving the Wireless Future, ROCm, Super AG, Super G, Total 802.11n, and Wake on Wireless are registered by Atheros Communications, Inc. Atheros SST, Signal-Sustain Technology, the Air is Cleaner at 5-GHz, XSPAN, Wireless Future. Unleashed Now., and 5-UP are trademarks of Atheros Communications, Inc. The Atheros logo is a registered trademark of Atheros Communications, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Notice The information in this document has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be accurate. Nonetheless, this document is subject to change without notice, and Atheros Communications, Inc. (Atheros) assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this document, and makes no commitment to update or to keep current the contained information, or to notify a person or organization of any updates. Atheros reserves the right to make changes, at any time, in order to improve reliability, function or design and to attempt to supply the best product possible. Atheros does not represent that products described herein are free from patent infringement or from any other third party right. No part of this document may be reproduced, adapted or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except as expressly set forth in a written agreement signed by Atheros. Atheros or its affiliates may have patents or pending patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, maskwork rights or other intellectual property rights that apply to the ideas, material and information expressed herein. No license to such rights is provided except as expressly set forth in a written agreement signed by Atheros. ATHEROS MAKES NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATHEROS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL SPECULATORY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN PARTICULAR, ATHEROS SHALL NOT HAVE LIABILITY FOR ANY HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, OR DATA TRANSMITTED OR OTHERWISE USED WITH THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE COSTS OF REPAIRING, REPLACING, INTEGRATING, INSTALLING OR RECOVERING SUCH HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR DATA. ATHEROS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AS THEY MIGHT OTHERWISE APPLY TO THIS DOCUMENT AND TO THE IDEAS, MATERIAL AND INFORMATION EXPRESSED HEREIN. Page 2 of 2 Revision Description of Changes Initial release Revision History Revision Feb. 1, 2011 Page 3 of 3 Introduction This document describes mandatory steps required by the OEM integrator when designing and manufacturing any host PC system utilizing this Atheros radio module. Also refer to the Atheros Regulatory Compliance Guide available on the Atheros customer support site and from the Atheros customer support contact person. This document lists the mandatory responsibilities and actions of the OEM integrator. Failure to comply with all requirements and conditions in this document may result in non-compliance of the host PC with FCC rules and invalidate the Atheros FCC certification for the module. This guide applies to this Client modules that act under control of an Access Point. Page 4 of 4 Max. average output power at antenna terminal Page 5 of 5 Allowed Antennas to be used with the Radio Module The Integrator must request from Atheros sales or regulatory contact person the current list of allowable antennas for use with the specific radio module. This information is not available on the public FCC database but will be provided by Atheros. Atheros will provide a table of antenna type(s) models, cable lengths, and peak gain in each band. Generally, the list will include Omni-directional Inverted-F (PIFA) and stamped metal/film antennas for use inside laptops. In some cases, dipole antenna types may be included in the available list. Peak gain including cable losses are quoted in the table provided by Atheros. Use of any of the antennas in the list (identical or equivalent antenna with lower gain, dimensions and cable lengths) is acceptable in the host device, without any further FCC testing or submission. However, use of an antenna that is higher gain than those on the list or is a Different Type, requires additional testing and submission to the FCC. Therefore, antennas with higher gain or different type than specified by Atheros may not be used with the Atheros module until new testing and reporting is completed. You must contact the Atheros Regulatory Group to report any higher gain or new antenna type to be used with the module. Antenna Placement This 1x1 802.11 a/b/g/n module has been certified by FCC as single module approval with the following restrictions:

The most conservative antenna-to-user separation distance shall be greater than 2 cm to end user or near-by person. 2 cm physical separation distance is measured by positioning the display section of notebook/Netbook/Laptop computers perpendicular to the keyboard section. Measure the distance from the nearest point of antenna to the bottom of host. Consult with Atheros to determine the allowable rotational orientations for vertical and horizontal antenna installation in applicable host devices. When antenna is installed in the typical notebook/Netbook/laptop computer platform, the antenna cable shall be positioned away from antenna elements to conform to configuration tested for compliance. When the antennas are installed in the display section of notebook/Netbook/Laptop computer platform, the display section shall not have metallic components and material that can influence or change the operating and exposure characteristics of the antennas. If any one of condition listed above can not comply, please consult with Atheros regulatory contact person to determine the applicable equipment authorization procedure before marketing the host device. Simultaneous transmission of Radio Module with Other Integrated or Plug-In Radios Based upon FCC Knowledge Database publication number 616217 D03 (Supplement) https://fjallfoss.fcc.gov/kdb/GetAttachment.html?id=30257, when there are multiple radios installed in a host device, RF exposure transmitting assessment shall be performed to determine the necessary application and test requirements. Certain criteria can be used in determine the requirement for simultaneous SAR evaluation and whether Class I or Class II permissive change may apply. A brief summary of the procedures is provided below. OEM integrators must consult the actual FCC KDB 616217 Supplement document for details:

Page 6 of 6 Identify all possible combinations of simultaneous transmission configurations for all transmitters and antennas installed in the display screen and keyboard of the intended host computer configurations and provide the following information:

o Antenna-to-antenna separation distance o Antenna-to-user separation distance Transmitters/antennas operating from external card slots and/or connectors of the host computers must be more than 5 cm from any simultaneous transmitting antennas If simultaneous transmission radio/module is installed in the host as portable device ( <

20 cm to the body of user) , determine the highest 1-g SAR value of each portable radio module for applicable simultaneous transmission operating modes and configurations. If simultaneous radio is installed in the host as mobile device (> 20 cm to the body of user) , determine the MPE (power density) according to the highest output power, , antenna gain and antenna-to-user separation distance in each frequency band. Determine the antenna to antenna separation distances as required for the conditions below a) When the [( of the highest measured 1-g SAR for each portable transmitter/antenna included in the simultaneous transmission configuration) / 1.6 W/kg] + of [(the highest MPE for each mobile transmitter/antenna included in the simultaneous transmission configuration) / (the corresponding MPE limit)] < 1; (where: excludes antennas that do not require SAR evaluation, the corresponding MPE limits based upon frequency band can be found at table 1 of section 1.1310 of CFR 47:

http://ecfr.gpoaccess.gov/cgi/t/text/text-

idx?c=ecfr&sid=788a1f4d7395e22ffa71dc3905fb2f10&rgn=div8&view=text&node=47:1.0

.1.1.2.9.193.10&idno=47) or b) For antennas included in the simultaneous transmission configuration that require SAR evaluation, when the separation distance between each antenna pair is i) greater than 5 [(SAR1 + SAR2) / 1.6]1.5 cm, rounded to the nearest cm, and ii) the of [(the highest MPE for each mobile transmitter/antenna included in the simultaneous transmission configuration) / (the corresponding MPE limit)] < 1 By satisfying condition a) or b) as listed above, simultaneous SAR evaluation is not required. Incorporation of this Atheros module in conjunction with other certified transmitters in a qualified host device can be addressed as a Class I permissive change. However, the simultaneous transmission conditions must be fully documented in Class I permissive change report as described in KDB 616217 Supplement.. For each simultaneous transmission configuration which does not meet the conditions described above, submit an inquiry to Atheros Regulatory Group or equivalent responsible party of the radio module to evaluate additional FCC evaluation or application requirements. Required Information to be documented in the Class I permissive change report Page 7 of 7 A summary of the information to be included in the Class I permissive change report is listed below. OEM integrators must consult the FCC KDB 616217 Supplement document for details. 1. FCC ID of all transmitters, maximum average conducted output power in each transmission mode and frequency band, operating configurations and exposure conditions approved for the individual transmitters. 2. Applicable antenna locations for all host configurations identified in diagrams, drawings and/or photos, including the range of antenna-to-user and antenna-to-antenna separation distances to support the required test reduction and exclusion analysis or SAR test configurations (The closest distance between each antenna and the user and the closest distance between individual antennas should be used.) 3. The type and physical dimensions of antennas incorporated in the intended host configurations 4. Antenna gain specified by the antenna manufacturer for antennas qualified for mobile exposure conditions 5. Other relevant information and restrictions required by the equipment certifications of individual transmitters, including antenna changes 6. The range of applicable physical, mechanical and electrical variations of host computer configurations supported by the test results in all relevant equipment certification. Page 8 of 8 Required Host System Labeling FCCID and Industry Canada ID The Integrator must affix the Atheros modules FCCID on the module. Also, when the module is not visible when installed in the host system, an additional label must appear on the outside of the host system visible to the user. Industry Canada (IC) labeling is only required on the module. Example FCC & Canada IDs to appear on module:

FCCID: PPD-AR5B125 IC: 4104A-AR5B125 Example wording also to appear somewhere on the outside of the host system visible to the end user:

Contains FCCID: PPD-AR5B125 FCC Logo The FCC logo shown below must appear on the host system signifying declared compliance of the system with FCC digital emissions rules. Required User Manual Wording for Host PC System The FCC requires the following text (or equivalent) included in the user documentation provided to the end user:

Example text which can be used by the Integrator in the end user instructions are:

Compliance Information:

The OEM integrator must incorporate appropriate operating instructions for all the transmitters and antennas installed in the host device with respect to any restrictions required for the individual transmitter certified by the FCC. Additional user instructions for meeting RF exposure requirements are not necessary for this Atheros module when installed in typical laptop/notebook/netbook computers provided the requirements in this document and KDB 616217 Supplement are fully satisfied. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This product does not contain any user serviceable components. Any unauthorized product changes or modifications will invalidate warranty and all applicable regulatory certifications and approvals. FCC Part 15 Digital Emissions Compliance We [System Manufacturer Name, Address, Telephone], declare under our sole responsibility that the product [System Name] complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful:

The Interference Handbook This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Stock No. 004-000-00345-4. Page 9 of 9 Industry Canada requires the following wording to the end user in French and English:

Industry Canada Notice:

This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmitting antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

"This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003"

Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada Avis de Conformit la Rglementation d'Industrie Canada:

Pour empcher toute interfrence aux services faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit tre utilis l'intrieur seulement et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. L'installateur du prsent matriel radio doit s'assurer que l'antenne est situe ou pointe de manire ce que cette dernire n'mette pas de champs radiolectriques suprieurs aux limites specifes par Sant Canada pour le grand public; consulter le Code de scurit 6, disponible sur le site Web de Sant Canada, l'adresse suivante: www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. End of Required User Manual Wording to end user provided by radio/system integrator Page 10 of 10

AR5B125 Product name 1X1 802.11b/g/n PCIe Module 20002009 by Atheros Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Atheros, Atheros Driven, Atheros XR, Driving the Wireless Future, ROCm, Super AG, Super G, Total 802.11n, and Wake on Wireless are registered by Atheros Communications, Inc. Atheros SST, Signal-Sustain Technology, the Air is Cleaner at 5-GHz, XSPAN, Wireless Future. Unleashed Now., and 5-UP are trademarks of Atheros Communications, Inc. The Atheros logo is a registered trademark of Atheros Communications, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Notice The information in this document has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be accurate. Nonetheless, this document is subject to change without notice, and Atheros Communications, Inc. (Atheros) assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this document, and makes no commitment to update or to keep current the contained information, or to notify a person or organization of any updates. Atheros reserves the right to make changes, at any time, in order to improve reliability, function or design and to attempt to supply the best product possible. Atheros does not represent that products described herein are free from patent infringement or from any other third party right. No part of this document may be reproduced, adapted or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except as expressly set forth in a written agreement signed by Atheros. Atheros or its affiliates may have patents or pending patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, maskwork rights or other intellectual property rights that apply to the ideas, material and information expressed herein. No license to such rights is provided except as expressly set forth in a written agreement signed by Atheros. ATHEROS MAKES NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATHEROS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL SPECULATORY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN PARTICULAR, ATHEROS SHALL NOT HAVE LIABILITY FOR ANY HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, OR DATA TRANSMITTED OR OTHERWISE USED WITH THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE COSTS OF REPAIRING, REPLACING, INTEGRATING, INSTALLING OR RECOVERING SUCH HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR DATA. ATHEROS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AS THEY MIGHT OTHERWISE APPLY TO THIS DOCUMENT AND TO THE IDEAS, MATERIAL AND INFORMATION EXPRESSED HEREIN. Document Conventions Text Conventions bold Bold type within paragraph text indicates commands, file names, directory names, paths, output, or returned values. Example: The DK_Client package will not function unless you use the wdreg_install batch file. italic Within commands, italics indicate a variable that the user must specify. Example: mem_alloc size_in_bytes Titles of manuals or other published documents are also set in italics. Courier The Courier font indicates output or display. Example:

Menu Error:Unable to allocate memory for transfer!

The Menu character tag is used for menu items. Example: Choose Edit > Copy.

Within commands, items enclosed in square brackets are optional parameters or values that the user can choose to specify or omit. Within commands, items enclosed in braces are options from which the user must choose. Within commands, the vertical bar separates options. An ellipsis indicates a repetition of the preceding parameter. The right angle bracket separates successive menu selections. Example: Start > Programs > DK > wdreg_install. Notices NOTE: This message denotes neutral or positive information that calls out important points to the text. A note provides information that may apply only in special cases. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL March 2011 iii Revision History Revision Description of Changes March 2009 Initial Release Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Introduction The Atheros 802.11n Adapter supports 802.11n. The card uses the Atheros Client Utility

(ACU) which is a user-mode utility designed to edit and add profiles for selected Atheros network interface adapters. System Requirements Laptop/ PC containing:

32-bit PCI Express Bus 32 MB memory or greater 300 MHz processor or higher Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows 98 Second Edition, Windows XP, or Windows NT 4.0 (with Service Pack 6) Profile Management Configure the wireless network adapter (wireless card) from the Profile Management tab of the Atheros Client Utility. Add a profile Edit a profile Import a Profile Export a Profile Order profiles Switch to a different profile Remove a profile Connect to a Different Network The wireless network adapter works in either infrastructure mode (which uses an access point) Create or Modify a Configuration Profile To add a new configuration profile, click New on the Profile Management tab. To modify a configuration profile, select the configuration from the Profile list and click the Modify button. The Profile Management dialog box displays the General tab. In profile management:

Edit the General tab. Edit the Security tab. Edit the Advanced tab. To configure a profile for access point (infrastructure) mode, edit the Network Type field on the Advanced tab. Note that the ACU only allows the creation of 16 configuration profiles. After the creation of 16 profiles, clicking the New button displays an error message. Remove an old profile or modify an existing profile for a new use. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL March 2011 v Remove a Configuration Profile 1. Go to the Profile Management tab. 2. Select the profile to remove from the list of configuration profiles. 3. Click the Remove button. Auto Profile Selection Management Including a profile in the auto selection feature allows the wireless adapter to automatically select that profile from the list of profiles and use it to connect to the network. Including a profile in auto profile selection:

1. On the Profile Management tab, click the Order Profiles button. 2. The Auto Profile Selection Management window appears, with a list of all created profiles in the Available Profiles box. 3. Highlight the profiles to add to auto profile selection, then click Add. The profiles appear in the Auto Selected Profiles box. Ordering the auto selected profiles:

1. Highlight a profile in the Auto Selected Profiles box. 2. Click Move Up, Move Down, or Remove as appropriate. The first profile in the Auto Selected Profiles box has highest priority, and the last profile has lowest priority. 3. Click OK. 4. Check the Auto Select Profiles box. 5. Save the modified configuration file. When auto profile selection is enabled by checking Auto Select Profiles on the Profile Management tab, the adapter scans for an available network. The profile with the highest priority and the same SSID as one of the found networks is the one that is used to connect to the network. If the connection fails, the adapter tries the next highest priority profile that matches the SSID, and so on. With auto profile selection enabled, the wireless adapter scans for available networks. The highest priority profile with the same SSID as a found network is used to connect to the network. On a failed connection, the adapter tries with the next highest priority profile. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Switching to a Different Configuration Profile 1. To switch to a different profile, go to the Profile Management tab. 2. Click on the profile name in the Profile List. 3. Click the Activate button. The Profile List provides icons that specify the operational state for that profile. The list also provides icons that specify the signal strength for that profile. Import and Export Profiles Importing a Profile 1. From the Profile Management tab, click the Import button. The Import Profile window appears. 2. Browse to the directory where the profile is located. 3. Highlight the profile name. 4. Click Open. The imported profile appears in the profiles list. Exporting a Profile 1. From the Profile Management tab, highlight the profile to export. 2. Click the Export button. The Export Profile window appears. 3. Browse to the directory to export the profile to. 4. Click Save. The profile is exported to the specified location. TCP/IP Configuration Configuring the TCP/IP Address for the network device:

1. After configuring the wireless network adapter properties, open the Control Panel and open Network and Dial-up Connections. 2. Find the Local Area Connection associated with the wireless network adapter. Right-

click that connection, and click Properties. 3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. 4. Click the radio button Use the following IP address, then enter an IP address and Subnet mask. Assigning an IP address and Subnet mask allows stations to operate in access point mode (infrastructure mode) and to have Internet access. Default gateway and DNS server information is also required. IP configuration information (DHCP to assign the IP address, gateway and DNS server IP addresses) is usually obtained from the corporate IT staff. 5. Click OK to finish. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL March 2011 vii General Tab In the Atheros Client Utility, access the General tab by clicking New or Modify on the Profile Management tab. Edit the fields in the General tab to configure the configuration profile. Make sure to also edit the Security and Advanced tabs. Profile Name Identifies the configuration profile. This name must be unique. Profile names are not case sensitive. Client Name Identifies the client machine. Network Names (SSIDs) The IEEE 802.11 wireless network name. This field has a maximum limit of 32 characters. Configure up to three SSIDs (SSID1, SSID2, and SSID3). Advanced Tab In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Advanced tab by clicking New or Modify on the Profile Management tab, then clicking the Advanced tab in Profile Management. Edit the fields in the Advanced tab of Profile Management to configure the profile. Transmit Power Level Power Save Mode Selects the transmit power level in mW. Actual transmit power may be limited by hardware. Specify:

Maximum mode causes the access point to buffer incoming messages for the wireless adapter. The adapter periodically polls the access point to see if any messages are waiting. Normal uses maximum when retrieving a large number of packets, then switches back to power save mode after retrieving the packets. Off turns power saving off, thus powering up the wireless adapter continuously for a short message response time. Network Type Specifies the network as either infrastructure. 802.11b Preamble Specifies the preamble setting in 802.11b. The default setting is Short &

Long (access point mode), which allows both short and long headers in the 802.11b frames. The adapter can only use short radio headers if the access point supports and uses them. Set to Long Only to override allowing short frames. Authentication Mode Select the mode the wireless adapter uses to authenticate to an AP:

Auto causes the adapter to attempt authentication using shared, but switches it to open authentication if shared fails. Open enables an adapter to attempt authentication regardless of its WEP settings. It will only associate with the access point if the WEP keys on both the adapter and the access point match. Shared only allows the adapter to associate with access points that Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com have the same WEP key. For infrastructure (access point) networks, click the Preferred APs button to specify up to four access points to which the adapter should attempt to associate. Security Tab In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab by clicking New or Modify on the Profile Management tab. Click the Security tab in the Profile Management window. Edit the fields in the Security tab of Profile Management to configure the profile. To define the security mode, select the radio button of the desired security mode. Make sure to also edit the General and Advanced tabs. WPA/WPA2 Enables the use of Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA). Choosing WPA/WPA2 opens the WPA/WPA2 EAP drop-down menu. The options include:

EAP-FAST EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP (EAP-GTC) PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) LEAP WPA/WPA2 Passphrase Enables WPA/WPA2 Passphrase security. Click on the Configure button and fill in the WPA/WPA2 Passphrase. 802.1x Enables 802.1x security. This option requires IT administration. Choosing 802.1x opens the 802.1x EAP type drop-down menu. The options include:

EAP-FAST EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP (EAP-GTC) PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) LEAP If the access point that the wireless adapter is associating to has WEP set to Optional and the client has WEP enabled, make sure that Allow Association to Mixed Cells is checked on the Security Tab to allow association. Note: If the Lock checkbox is checked, you cannot change any values in this profile. See your system administrator. Pre-Shared Key

(Static WEP) Enables the use of pre-shared keys that are defined on both the access point and the station. To define pre-shared encryption keys, choose the Pre-Shared Key radio button and click the Configure button to fill in the Define Pre-

Shared Keys window. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL March 2011 ix If the access point that the wireless adapter is associating to has WEP set to Optional and the client has WEP enabled, make sure that Allow Association to Mixed Cells is checked on the Security Tab to allow association. None No security (not recommended). Using EAP-TLS Security To use EAP-TLS security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose EAP-TLS from the drop-down menu. Enabling EAP-TLS security:

To use EAP-TLS security, the machine must already have the EAP-TLS certificates downloaded onto it. Check with the IT manager. 1. If EAP-TLS is supported, choose EAP-TLS from the drop-down menu on the right, then click the Configure button. 2. Select the appropriate certificate authority from the list. The server/domain name and the login name are filled in automatically from the certificate information. Click OK. 3. Click OK. 4. Activate the profile. Using EAP-TTLS Security To use EAP security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA/WPA2 radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose EAP-TTLS from the drop-down menu. Enabling EAP-TTLS security:

To use EAP-TTLS security, the machine must already have the EAP-TTLS certificates downloaded onto it. Check with the IT manager. 1. If EAP-TTLS is supported, choose EAP-TTLS from the drop-down menu on the right, then click the Configure button. 2. Select the appropriate certificate from the drop-down list and click OK. 3. Specify a user name for EAP authentication:

Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the EAP user name. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com OR: Enter an EAP user name in the User Name field to use a separate user name and password and start the EAP authentication process. 4. Click Advanced and:

Leave the server name field blank for the client to accept a certificate from any server with a certificate signed by the authority listed in the Network Certificate Authority drop-down list. (recommended) Enter the domain name of the server from which the client will accept a certificate. Change the login name if needed. 5. Click OK. 6. Enable the profile. Using PEAP (EAP-GTC) Security To use PEAP (EAP-GTC) security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose PEAP (EAP-GTC) from the drop-down menu. To use PEAP (EAP-GTC) security, the server must have WPA-PEAP certificates, and the server properties must already be set. Check with the IT manager. 1. Click the Configure button. 2. To avoid the need to log on again after resuming operation (for example, after your computer goes into standby or hibernate mode), check Always Resume the Secure Session. 3. Select the appropriate network certificate authority from the drop-down list. 4. Specify a user name for inner PEAP tunnel authentication:

Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the PEAP user name. OR: Enter a PEAP user name in the User Name field to use a separate user name and start the PEAP authentication process. 5. Choose Token or Static Password, depending on the user database. Note that Token uses a hardware token device or the Secure Computing SofToken program (version 1.3 or later) to obtain and enter a one-time password during authentication. 6. Click Settings... and:

Leave the server name field blank for the client to accept a certificate from any server with a certificate signed by the authority listed in the Network Certificate Authority drop-down list. (recommended) Enter the domain name of the server from which the client will accept a certificate. The login name used for PEAP tunnel authentication fills in automatically as PEAP-xxxxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxxxxx is the computer's MAC address. Change the login name if needed. 7. Click OK. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL March 2011 xi 8. Enable the profile. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Using PEAP-MSCHAP V2 Security To use PEAP-MSCHAP V2 security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) from the drop-down menu. To use PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) security, the server must have WPA-PEAP certificates, and the server properties must already be set. Check with the IT manager. 1. Click the Configure button. 2. Select the appropriate certificate from the drop-down list. 3. Specify a user name for inner PEAP tunnel authentication:

Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the PEAP user name. OR: Enter a PEAP user name in the User Name field to use a separate user name and start the PEAP authentication process. 4. Click Advanced and:

Leave the server name field blank for the client to accept a certificate from any server with a certificate signed by the authority listed in the Network Certificate Authority drop-down list. (recommended) Enter the domain name of the server from which the client will accept a certificate. The login name used for PEAP tunnel authentication fills in automatically as PEAP-xxxxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxxxxx is the computer's MAC address. Change the login name if needed. 5. Click OK. 6. Enable the profile. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL March 2011 xiii Using LEAP Security To use security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. LEAP security requires that all infrastructure devices (e.g. access points and servers) are configured for LEAP authentication. Check with the IT manager. Configuring LEAP On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. Choose WPA-LEAP from the drop-down menu. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. Choose LEAP from the drop-down menu. 1. Click the Configure button. 2. Specify a user name and password. Select to Use Temporary User Name and Password by choosing the radio button:

Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the LEAP user name. OR: Check Manually Prompt for LEAP User Name and Password to manually login and start the LEAP authentication process. Select to Use Saved User Name and Password by choosing the radio button:

Specify the LEAP user name, password, and domain to save and use. 3. Enter the user name and password. 4. Confirm the password. 5. Specify a domain name:

Check the Include Windows Logon Domain with User Name setting to pass the Windows login domain and user name to the RADIUS server. (default) OR: Enter a specific domain name. 6. If desired, check No Network Connection Unless User Is Logged In to force the wireless adapter to disassociate after logging off. 7. Enter the LEAP authentication timeout time (between 30 and 500 seconds) to specify how long LEAP should wait before declaring authentication failed, and sending an error message. The default is 90 seconds. 8. Click OK. 9. Enable the profile. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Pre-Shared Encryption Keys Defining pre-shared encryption keys:

1. Click the Pre-Shared Key (Static WEP) radio button on the Security tab. 2. Click the Configure button. 3. Fill in the fields in the Define Pre-Shared Keys dialog box:

Key Entry Determines the entry method for an encryption key: hexadecimal (0-9, A-F), or ASCII text (all keyboard characters except spaces). Encryption Keys WEP Keys

(1-4) WEP Key Size Selects the default encryption keys used. Only allows the selection for a shared First, Second, Third, or Fourth key whose corresponding field has been completed. Defines a set of shared encryption keys for network configuration security. At least one Shared Key field must be populated to enable security using a shared key. Click on the radio button to set the key as the default encryption key. Defines the size for each encryption key. The options include:

64-bit (enter 10 digits for hexadecimal, 5 ASCII characters) 128-bit (enter 26 digits for hexadecimal, 13 digits for ASCII) 152-bit (enter 32 digits hexadecimal, 16 digits for ASCII) 4. Click OK for the changes to take effect. Overwriting an Existing Static WEP Key 1. Click the Pre-Shared Key radio button on the Security tab. 2. Click on Configure. 3. In the window, all existing static WEP keys are displayed as asterisks for security reasons. Click in the field of the existing static WEP key to overwrite. 4. Delete the asterisks in that field. 5. Enter a new key. 6. Make sure to select the Transmit Key button to the left of this key is selected for the key to transmit packets. 7. Click OK. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL March 2011 xv Disabling Static WEP To disable static WEP for a particular profile, Select any other security option on the Profile Management tab to automatically disable static WEP OR: choose None on the Security tab to disable security, and click OK (not recommended). Using WPA Passphrase Security To use WPA Passphrase security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA Passphrase radio button. 2. Click on the Configure button. 3. Fill in the WPA Passphrase. 4. Click OK. Zero Configuration This section describes the operation of the Atheros Client Utility (ACU) and Windows XP Wireless Configuration Service (WZCS). Wireless Network Configuration The Windows WZCS is a service that manages the wireless connection in a largely dynamic way. Only minimal connection information must be identified and configured. To set Zero Configuration on Windows XP, take the following steps:

1. 2. Select the check box Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings to set In Windows XP, open the Wireless Network Configuration Properties dialog box. Zero Configuration. When this check box is selected, Windows XP takes control of these settings for all configuration profiles:

SSID Security keys Note that Windows XP takes control of these settings for all configuration profiles, thus users can not ( create new profiles with different settings while using Windows Zero Configuration. The Zero Configuration settings override all configuration profiles, even when you select other options. However, the ACU does still control the following settings when Zero Configuration is set:

Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Power settings Active/Passive scanning (where applicable) Transmit power Wireless band Short/Long preamble (802.11b) When Zero Configuration is in use, a pop-up message is displayed on the ACU when you attempt to create or edit a configuration profile from the Profile Management tab of the ACU. In Windows XP, open the Wireless Network Configuration Properties dialog box. To turn Zero Configuration off on Windows XP, take the following steps:

1. 2. Clear the check box Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings to set Zero Configuration. When this check box is cleared, all profile settings are controlled by the configuration profile, which is set up from the ACU Profile Management tab. Check the Status Information or Diagnostics The Atheros client utility includes a number of tools to display current diagnostics and status information. Check current status Check driver information Check receive and transmit diagnostics Current Status The Current Status tab contains general information about the program and its operations. The Current Status tab does not require any configuration. The following table describes the items found on the Current Status screen. Profile Name The name of the current selected configuration profile. Set up the configuration name on the General tab. Link Status Shows whether the station is associated to the wireless network. Wireless Mode Displays the wireless mode. Configure the wireless mode on the Advanced tab. IP Address Displays the computer's IP address. Network Type The type of network the station is connected to. Options include:

Infrastructure (access point) Current Channel Shows the currently connected channel. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xvii March 2011 Server Based Authentication Data Encryption Displays the encryption type the driver is using. Configure the Shows whether server based authentication is used. encryption type on the Security tab. Signal Strength Shows the strength of the signal. Click the Advanced button to see the advanced status diagnostics. Adapter Information Button The Adapter Information button contains general information about the network interface card (the wireless network adapter) and the network driver interface specification (NDIS) driver. Access the adapter information from the Diagnostics tab. Card Name Name of the wireless network adapter. MAC Address MAC address of the wireless network adapter. Driver Driver name and path of the wireless network adapter driver. Driver Version Version of the wireless network adapter driver. Driver Date Creation date of the wireless network adapter driver. Client Name Name of the client computer. Diagnostics Tab The ACU Diagnostics tab provides allows retrieval of receive and transmit statistics. The Diagnostics tab does not require any configuration. It lists these receive and transmit diagnostics for frames received by or transmitted by the wireless network adapter:

Multicast packets transmitted and received Broadcast packets transmitted and received Unicast packets transmitted and received Total bytes transmitted and received The Adapter Information button has general information about the wireless network adapter and NDIS driver. The Advanced Statistics button to shows statistics for diagnostics for frames received by or transmitted to the wireless network adapter:

Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Transmitted Frames Frames transmitted OK Frames retried Frames dropped No ACK frames ACK frames RTS frames Clear-to-send (CTS) frames No CTS frames Retried RTS frames Retried data frames Received Frames Frames received OK Beacons Frames with errors CRC errors Encryption errors Duplicate frames AP mismatches Data rate mismatches Authentication time-out Authentication rejects: the number of AP authentication failures received by the wireless network adapter Association time-out Association rejects: the number of AP authentication rejects received by the wireless network adapter Standard MIC OK Standard MIC errors CKIP MIC OK CKIP MIC errors Scan Available Networks Scan Available Networks Scan Available Networks Scan Available Networks Click the Scan button on the Profile Management tab to scan for available infrastructure . On this list, click Refresh to refresh the list at any time. Connecting to a different network Highlight a network name and click the Activate button to connect an available network. If no configuration profile exists for that network, the Profile Management window opens to the General tab. Fill in the profile name and click OK to create the configuration profile for that network. Infrastructure

(AP) Network Connected Infrastructure

(AP) Network Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL March 2011 xix Encryption Active Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Display Settings To change the display settings, choose Options > Display Settings from the menu. The display settings dialog box contains tools to set the:

Signal Strength Display Units Sets the units used when displaying signal strength: percentage (%) or dBm. Refresh Interval Use the up/down arrows to set the display refresh interval in seconds. Data Display Sets the display to cumulative or relative:

Relative displays the change in statistical data since the last update. Cumulative displays statistical data collected since opening the profile. ACU Tools Use the Action menu to access the Atheros Client Utility tools:

Enable/Disable Radio Enable or disable the RF Signal on all Atheros Enable/Disable Tray Icon station reference designs. Enable or disable the tray icon. Troubleshooting Run the optional Troubleshooting Utility. Manual LEAP Login Log in to LEAP manually, if LEAP is set to manually prompt for user name and password on each login. Reauthenticate Reauthenticate to a LEAP-configured access point. Exit Exit the Atheros Client Utility application. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL March 2011 xxi Tray Icon The tray icon appears at the bottom of the screen, and shows the signal strength using colors and the received signal strength indication (RSSI). Hold the mouse cursor over the tray icon to display the current configuration profile name and association, as well as transmit and receive speed and the wireless adapter name and IP address. Right-click on the tray icon to:

Help Open the online help. Open Atheros Client Utility Launch the Atheros Client Utility (ACU). Use the ACU to configure a profile or view status and statistics information. Troubleshooting Run the Troubleshooting Utility. Preferences Set the ACU startup and menu options. Check to start the program automatically when Windows starts, and check menu items that should appear on the popup menu. Enable/Disable Radio Enable or disable the RF signal. Manual LEAP Login Log in to LEAP manually, if LEAP is set to manually prompt for user name and password on each login. Reauthenticate Reauthenticate to the access point. Select Profile Click a configuration profile name to switch to. If no configuration profile exists for a connection, add a profile. Show Connection Status Shows whether auto profile selection is enabled. This window displays connection information:

Active Profile Displays the active configuration profile name. Auto Profile Selection Connection Status Link Quality SSID Access Point Name Displays whether the adapter is connected to a wireless network. Shows the name of the AP the wireless adapter is connected to. Displays the SSID of the associated network. Lists the quality of the link connection. Access Point IP Address Link Speed Shows the IP address of the access point the wireless adapter is connected to. Lists the speed of the link connection. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Adapter IP Address Displays the IP address of the wireless adapter. Exit Exit the Atheros Client Utility application. The colors are defined as follows:

Color Green Green Yellow Red Gray Quality Excellent Good Poor Poor RSSI*

20 dB +

10-20 dB +

5-10 dB

< 5 dB No Connection No Connection

*Received signal strength indication RSSI. Displayed in dB or percentage. Enable or disable the tray icon in the Action menu. Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode In infrastructure (access point (AP)) mode, the wireless network adapter participates in a basic service set (BSS) as a station, and communicates with the other stations through an AP, as illustrated here. To connect to an access point network, configure the profile for access point mode. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxiii March 2011 Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode Profile Configuration To configure a profile in infrastructure (access point) mode, change the Network Type in the Advanced tab. For access point mode, modify the settings:

Power Save Mode 802.11b Preamble (if using 802.11b) Wireless Mode 802.11 Authentication Mode Make sure to also edit the General and Security tabs. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Uninstall an Old Driver Uninstall an old driver before upgrading to a new NDIS driver release. To remove the newly installed driver from the system if the system does not have previously installed versions of the NDIS driver, proceed to Step 4. 1. To remove the NDIS driver from the OS, go to Device Manager, right-click Atheros AR500x Wireless Network Adapter, and choose Uninstall. 2. Click OK to uninstall the device. 3. When the device is uninstalled from Device Manager, search for and delete the driver files that reside in the system. a. Go to the Start menu and choose Search > For Files or Folders. b. Enter oem*.inf in the Search for files or folders named: field, and enter Atheros in the Containing text: field. c. Click Search Now. A few files matching these criteria are possible, if previous drivers have not been removed properly. d. Choose the files that have been found and delete them from the system. 4. To complete the uninstallation, remove the file ar5211.sys from the folder

\WINNT\system32\drivers. Additional Security Features These security features prevent attacks on a wireless network's WEP keys. The wireless adapter automatically supports each of these features, but these features must be enabled on the access point. Message Integrity Check (MIC) MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets. In a bit-flip attack, someone intercepts an encrypted message retransmits it after some alterations. Thus the receiver accepts the message as legitimate. The MIC adds some bytes to each packet to protect it against tampering. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) This feature prevents attacks on WEP in which someone catches encrypted packets and uses their initialization vector (IV) to decipher the WEP key. TKIP removes the predictability to protect both unicast and broadcast WEP keys. Broadcast Key Rotation EAP authentication provides dynamic unicast WEP keys for wireless adapters, but uses static broadcast keys. In broadcast WEP key rotation, the access point supplies a dynamic broadcast WEP key and changes it at intervals. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxv March 2011 Advanced Status Information Click the Advanced button on the Current Status tab of the Atheros Client Utility to see advanced information about the program and its operations. The Current Status tab does not require any configuration. The following table describes the items found on the Advanced Status screen. Network Name (SSID) Displays the wireless network name. Configure the network name on the General tab. Shows whether server based authentication is used. Server Based Authentication Data Encryption Displays the encryption type the driver is using. Configure the encryption type on the Security tab. Authentication Type Displays the authentication mode. Configure the authentication mode on the General tab. Message Integrity Check Shows whether MIC is enabled. MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets. Associated AP Name Displays the name of the access point the wireless adapter is associated to. Associated AP IP Address Associated AP MAC Address Shows the IP address of the access point the wireless adapter is associated to. Displays the MAC address of the access point the wireless adapter is associated to. Power Save Mode Configure the power save mode on the Advanced tab. Current Power Level Displays the transmit power level rate in mW. Current Signal Strength Shows the current signal strength in dBm. Current Noise Level Displays the current noise level in dBm. Up Time Shows how long the client adapter has been receiving power (in hours:minutes:seconds). If the adapter runs for more than 24 hours, the display shows in days:hours:minutes:seconds. 802.11b Preamble Displays the 802.11b preamble format. Configure the preamble format on the Advanced tab. Current Receive Rate Shows the current receive rate in Mbps. Current Transmit Rate Displays the current transmit rate in Mbps. Channel Shows the currently connected channel. Frequency Displays frequency the station is using. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Channel Set Shows the current channel set. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxvii March 2011 Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

**This module also has mobile configuration when using dipole antenna.**

IMPORTANT NOTE:

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

The product comply with the US/Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or reduce output power if it doesn't affect the transmission/receiving quality. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. This equipment has been SAR-evaluated for use in laptops (notebooks) with side slot configuration. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:

The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna, For all products market in US, OEM has to limit the operation channels in CH1 to CH11 for 2.4G band by supplied firmware programming tool. OEM shall not supply any tool or info to the end-

user regarding to Regulatory Domain change. As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed (for example, digital device emissions, PC peripheral requirements, etc.). IMPORTANT NOTE: In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the FCC authorization is no longer considered valid and the FCC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product

(including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate FCC authorization. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:

The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users, and As long as 1 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed (for example, digital device emissions, PC peripheral requirements, etc.). End Product Labeling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where the antenna may be installed such that 20 cm may be maintained between the antenna and users. The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains TX FCC ID: PPD-AR5B125. Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module.The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxix March 2011 Industry Canada statement:

This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. IMPORTANT NOTE:

Radiation Exposure Statement:

The product comply with the US/Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. NOTE IMPORTANTE: (Pour l'utilisation des appareils portables) Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:

Le produit est conforme aux limites d'exposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-

Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si l'appareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 3.62 dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.

(Le manuel d'utilisation de dispositifs metteurs quips d'antennes amovibles doit contenir les informations suivantes dans un endroit bien en vue:) Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com Ce dispositif a t conu pour fonctionner avec une antenne ayant un gain maximal de dBi 3.62. Une antenne gain plus lev est strictement interdite par les rglements d'Industrie Canada. L'impdance d'antenne requise est de 50 ohms. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:

1) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna, 2) For all products market in Canada, OEM has to limit the operation channels in CH1 to CH11 for 2.4G band by supplied firmware programming tool. OEM shall not supply any tool or info to the end-user regarding to Regulatory Domain change. As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. Cet appareil est conu uniquement pour les intgrateurs OEM dans les conditions suivantes:

(Pour utilisation de dispositif module) 1) Le module metteur peut ne pas tre complant avec un autre metteur ou antenne, 2) Pour tous les produits vendus au Canada, OEM doit limiter les frquences de fonctionnement CH1 CH11 pour bandes de frquences 2.4G grce aux outils de microprogrammation fournis. OEM ne doit pas fournir d'outil ou d'informations l'utilisateur final en ce qui concerne le changement de rglementation de domaine. Tant que les 2 conditions ci-dessus sont remplies, des essais supplmentaires sur l'metteur ne seront pas ncessaires. Toutefois, l'intgrateur OEM est toujours responsable des essais sur son produit final pour toutes exigences de conformit supplmentaires requis pour ce module install. This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 3.62 dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.

(Le manuel d'utilisation de dispositifs metteurs quips d'antennes amovibles doit contenir les informations suivantes dans un endroit bien en vue:) Ce dispositif a t conu pour fonctionner avec une antenne ayant un gain maximal de dBi 3.62. Une antenne gain plus lev est strictement interdite par les rglements d'Industrie Canada. L'impdance d'antenne requise est de 50 ohms. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:

Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxxi March 2011 1) The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users, and As long as 1 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. Cet appareil est conu uniquement pour les intgrateurs OEM dans les conditions suivantes:

(Pour utilisation de dispositif module) 1) L'antenne doit tre installe de telle sorte qu'une distance de 20 cm est respecte entre l'antenne et les utilisateurs, et Tant que les 1 conditions ci-dessus sont remplies, des essais supplmentaires sur l'metteur ne seront pas ncessaires. Toutefois, l'intgrateur OEM est toujours responsable des essais sur son produit final pour toutes exigences de conformit supplmentaires requis pour ce module install. End Product Labeling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device where the antenna may be installed such that 20 cm may be maintained between the antenna and users. The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains IC: 4104A-AR5B125. Plaque signaltique du produit final Ce module metteur est autoris uniquement pour une utilisation dans un dispositif o l'antenne peut tre installe de telle sorte qu'une distance de 20cm peut tre maintenue entre l'antenne et les utilisateurs. Le produit final doit tre tiquet dans un endroit visible avec l'inscription suivante: "Contient des IC: 4104A-AR5B125". IMPORTANT NOTE:

In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the Canada authorization is no longer considered valid and the IC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate Canada authorization. Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com NOTE IMPORTANTE:

Dans le cas o ces conditions ne peuvent tre satisfaites (par exemple pour certaines configurations d'ordinateur portable ou de certaines co-localisation avec un autre metteur), l'autorisation du Canada n'est plus considr comme valide et l'ID IC ne peut pas tre utilis sur le produit final. Dans ces circonstances, l'intgrateur OEM sera charg de rvaluer le produit final (y compris l'metteur) et l'obtention d'une autorisation distincte au Canada. Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. Manuel d'information l'utilisateur final L'intgrateur OEM doit tre conscient de ne pas fournir des informations l'utilisateur final quant la faon d'installer ou de supprimer ce module RF dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit final qui intgre ce module. Le manuel de l'utilisateur final doit inclure toutes les informations rglementaires requises et avertissements comme indiqu dans ce manuel. This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. For NCC Statement XXXXXXXXXX Atheros Communications, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxxiii March 2011 Japan Telecom Certification JATE Atheros Communications, Incorporated 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 www.atheros.com

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a refund subject to the refund policy of your place of purchase. For any further information or to request a full refund of the computer, please contact your local point of sale (the seller). Copyright 2012 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: February 2012 Document Part Number: 671383-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Starting right ................................................................................................................................................... 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Fun things to do .................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ..................................................................................................................... 3 Finding your hardware and software information ................................................................................. 3 Front ..................................................................................................................................................... 3 Right side ............................................................................................................................................. 4 Left side ................................................................................................................................................ 6 Rear ...................................................................................................................................................... 7 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 8 Top ..................................................................................................................................................... 10 TouchPad .......................................................................................................................... 10 Lights ................................................................................................................................. 11 Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader (select models only) ......................................... 12 Keys ................................................................................................................................... 14 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................ 16 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 17 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 18 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 18 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 18 Using the wireless button .................................................................................. 19 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ........................................ 19 Using operating system controls ....................................................................... 19 Using a WLAN ................................................................................................................... 20 Using an Internet service provider .................................................................... 20 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................ 21 Configuring a wireless router ............................................................................ 21 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 21 v Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................... 22 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ..................................................... 22 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) .......................................................................................... 23 4 Enjoying entertainment features ................................................................................................................. 24 Using the webcam .............................................................................................................................. 25 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 26 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 26 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................... 27 Connecting a microphone .................................................................................................. 27 Using Beats Audio ............................................................................................................. 27 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ............................................................... 27 Enabling and Disabling Beats Audio ................................................................. 27 Checking the sound ........................................................................................................... 28 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 28 Connecting a VGA monitor or projector ............................................................................. 29 Connecting an HDMI TV or monitor ................................................................................... 30 Configuring audio settings (with HDMI TV) ....................................................... 31 Using Intel Wireless Display (select models only) ............................................................. 31 Managing your audio and video files .................................................................................................. 31 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices .................................................................................................. 32 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 33 Using ALT GR key combinations ....................................................................................... 33 Using the action keys ......................................................................................................... 33 Using the hot keys ............................................................................................................. 35 Using the keypad ............................................................................................................... 35 Using the integrated numeric keypad ................................................................ 35 Using the TouchPad ........................................................................................................................... 36 Turning the TouchPad off or on ......................................................................................... 36 Navigating .......................................................................................................................... 37 Selecting ............................................................................................................................ 37 Using TouchPad gestures ................................................................................................. 38 Scrolling ............................................................................................................ 39 Pinching/Zooming ............................................................................................. 39 Rotating ............................................................................................................. 40 Flicking .............................................................................................................. 40 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................ 41 Using Sleep or Hibernation ................................................................................................................ 42 vi Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................................. 42 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ........................................................................................ 43 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 43 Using the power meter ....................................................................................................................... 44 Selecting a power plan ....................................................................................................................... 44 Running on battery power .................................................................................................................. 45 Removing a user-replaceable battery ................................................................................ 45 Finding battery information ................................................................................................ 45 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 46 Identifying low battery levels .............................................................................................. 46 Storing a user-replaceable battery ..................................................................................... 46 Disposing of a user-replaceable battery ............................................................................ 47 Replacing a user-replaceable battery ................................................................................ 47 Running on external power ................................................................................................................ 47 Using HP CoolSense (select models only) ......................................................................................... 48 Shutting down the computer ............................................................................................................... 48 7 Managing and sharing information ............................................................................................................. 49 Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 49 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 49 Removing a USB device .................................................................................................... 50 Connecting a powered USB device ................................................................................... 50 Inserting and removing digital storage cards ...................................................................................... 51 Using optical drives ............................................................................................................................ 52 Inserting an optical disc ..................................................................................................... 53 Removing an optical disc ................................................................................................... 54 Sharing drives on the network ........................................................................................... 54 8 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 55 Improving performance ...................................................................................................................... 55 Handling drives .................................................................................................................. 55 Replacing a hard drive ....................................................................................................... 56 Using HP 3D DriveGuard ................................................................................................... 58 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 58 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding or replacing memory modules ............................................................................... 59 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 62 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................... 62 Cleaning the display, sides, and cover .............................................................................. 62 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard .............................................................................. 62 Traveling with or shipping your computer ........................................................................................... 63 vii 9 Securing your computer and information .................................................................................................. 64 Locating your security software .......................................................................................................... 65 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 65 Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 66 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 66 Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) ............................................................................... 67 Using HP SimplePass ........................................................................................................ 67 Registering fingerprints ..................................................................................... 67 Using your registered fingerprint to log on to Windows ..................................... 67 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................... 68 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................... 68 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................... 68 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................. 69 Installing Windows security updates .................................................................................. 69 Installing HP and third-party software updates .................................................................. 69 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................... 70 Backing up your software applications and information ..................................................................... 70 Using an optional security cable lock ................................................................................................. 70 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics ............................................................................... 71 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 71 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 71 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 72 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 72 Using System Diagnostics .................................................................................................................. 73 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ..................................................................................................... 74 Creating backups ............................................................................................................................... 74 Creating recovery media to recover the original system .................................................... 74 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 75 Creating the recovery media ............................................................ 75 Creating system restore points .......................................................................................... 75 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 76 Creating a system restore point ........................................................................ 76 Backing up system and personal information .................................................................... 76 Tips for a successful backup ............................................................................. 76 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 77 Creating a backup using Windows Backup and Restore .................................. 77 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 78 viii Restoring to a previous system restore point .................................................................... 78 Restoring specific files ....................................................................................................... 78 Restoring specific files using Windows Backup and Restore ............................ 78 Recovering the original system using HP Recovery Manager ........................................... 78 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 78 Recovering using HP Recovery partition (select models only) ......................... 79 Recovering using the recovery media ............................................................... 79 Changing the computer boot order ................................................... 80 12 Specifications .............................................................................................................................................. 81 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 81 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 82 13 Troubleshooting and support .................................................................................................................... 83 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 84 Disc drive problems ........................................................................................................... 84 Wireless connection problems ........................................................................................... 84 Cannot connect to a WLAN ............................................................................... 85 Cannot connect to a preferred network ............................................................. 85 Current network security codes are unavailable ............................................... 86 WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................... 86 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................... 87 Network status icon is not displayed ................................................................. 87 Audio problems .................................................................................................................. 87 Power management problems ........................................................................................... 88 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 88 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 88 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available .... 88 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 88 Troubleshooting an AC adapter ........................................................................ 88 Contacting customer support ............................................................................................................. 90 14 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 91 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 92 ix x 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. To get the most out of your computer, read this chapter to learn about best practices after setup, fun things to do with your computer, and where to go to get more HP resources. Best practices To protect your smart investment, after you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps:

If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 18. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. Go to Getting to know your computer on page 3 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 24 for information. Update or purchase antivirus software. Learn more at Using antivirus software on page 68. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 74. Fun things to do You know you can watch a YouTube video on the computer. But did you know that you can also connect your computer to a TV and watch the video on TV? For more information, see Connecting an HDMI TV or monitor on page 30. You know you can listen to music on the computer. But did you know that you can also stream live radio to the computer and listen to music or talk radio from all over the world? See Using audio on page 26. You know you can create a powerful presentation with Microsoft applications. But did you know you can also connect to a projector to share your ideas with a group? See Connecting a VGA monitor or projector on page 29. Best practices 1 More HP resources You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. For product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resource Setup Instructions Help and Support To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. For more details, go to http://www.hp.com/

support. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides, or go to http://www.hp.com/

ergo. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to www.hp.com/

support. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this guide, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Contents Overview of computer setup and features. A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips. Proper workstation setup. Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury. Electrical and mechanical safety information. Chat online with an HP technician. Email customer support. Find worldwide customer support telephone numbers. Locate HP service center locations. Important regulatory notices, including proper battery disposal information. Limited Warranty*

Specific warranty information about this computer. To access the warranty, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides or go to http://www.hp.com/

go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd, Boise, ID 83714, USA Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your serial number label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For product support, see your product home page at http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right 2 Getting to know your computer Finding your hardware and software information Select Start > Computer. A list displays all the devices installed in your computer, including optical drives, solid-state drives

(SSDs), or a secondary hard drive. To find out what software is included on your computer, select Start > All Programs. Front Component Digital Media Slot Description Supports the following digital card formats:

Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Secure Digital Extended Capacity (SDxC) Memory Card Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) Memory Card Ultra High Speed MultiMediaCard (UHS/MMC) Finding your hardware and software information 3 Right side Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Optical drive Optical drive light Reads and writes (select models only) to an optical disc. Green: The optical drive is being accessed. Off: The optical drive is idle. Optical drive eject button Releases the disc tray. Power light White: The computer is on. Blinking white: The computer is in the Sleep state, which is an energy-saving mode. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is an energy-saving mode that uses the least amount of power. NOTE: For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. For more information, see Using Sleep or Hibernation on page 42. Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. NOTE: For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see Using HP 3D DriveGuard on page 58. Connects an optional USB 3.0 device and provides enhanced USB power performance. NOTE: For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 49. Hard drive light USB 3.0 port USB 2.0 port Connects an optional USB device. NOTE: For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 49. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component

(8) AC adapter light Description White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The computer is using DC power.

(9)

(10) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Right side 5 Left side Component

(1) Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. HDMI port Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio device. RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable. USB 3.0 ports (2) Audio-in (microphone) jack Audio-out (headphone) jack Connect an optional USB 3.0 device and provide enhanced USB power performance. NOTE: For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 49. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connect optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to a headphone jack, the computer speakers are disabled. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Rear Component Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Rear 7 Display Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) WLAN antennas (2)*

Internal microphones (2) HP TrueVision HD Webcam Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Record sound. Records video, captures still photographs, allows video conferences and online chat by means of streaming video. To use the webcam, select Start > All Programs >

Communication and Chat > CyberLink YouCam. Webcam light Speakers (2) On: The webcam is in use. Produce sound.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the area immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) WLAN antennas (2)*

Internal microphones (2) HP TrueVision HD Webcam Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Record sound. Records video, captures still photographs, allows you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam, select Start > All Programs >

Communication and Chat > CyberLink YouCam

(4) Webcam light On: The webcam is in use.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Display 9 Top TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) TouchPad on/off button TouchPad light TouchPad zone Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Description Turns the TouchPad on or off. On: The TouchPad is off. Off: The TouchPad is on. Moves the on-screen pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Lights Component Description

(1) Power light White: The computer is on. Blinking white: The computer is in the Sleep state, which is an energy-saving mode. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is an energy-saving mode that uses the least amount of power. NOTE: For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. For more information, see Using Sleep or Hibernation on page 42. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. White: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Amber: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. Mute light Wireless light Caps lock light Fingerprint reader light (select models only) White: The fingerprint was read. Amber: The fingerprint was not read. Top 11

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader (select models only) Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold down the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start >

Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, or see Managing power on page 41.

(2)

(3) Speakers (2) Produce sound. Fingerprint reader (select models only) Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component

(1) Power button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start >

Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, or see Managing power on page 41.

(2) Speakers (2) Produce sound. Top 13 Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the esc key or the b key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. b key Enables or disables Beats Audio when pressed in combination with the fn key. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. Opens Beats Audio Control Panel, which allows you to view and control all audio settings. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. NOTE: You can also open the Beats Audio Control Panel by selecting Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Beats Audio Control Panel. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the cursor. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component

(7) num lock key

(8) Integrated numeric keypad Description Controls the function of the integrated numeric keypad. Press the key to alternate between the standard numeric function of an external keypad (selected at the factory) and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys). NOTE: The keypad function that is active when the computer is turned off is reinstated when the computer is turned back on Set at the factory to function like an external numeric keypad. To alternate between this numeric function and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys), press the num lock key. Top 15 Bottom Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Battery bay Battery release latch Description Holds the battery. Releases the battery from the battery bay and opens the service door. Vents (3) Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Integrated subwoofer Provides superior bass sound. Hard drive bay, wireless compartment, and memory module compartment The service door provides access to the hard drive bay, wireless compartment and memory module compartment. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, replace the wireless module only with a wireless module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact customer support through Help and Support. 16 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. The labels are in easily accessible locations. Serial number labelProvides important information, including the following:

Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Product name Serial number Product part number

(4) Warranty period

(5) Model description Have this information available when you contact technical support. The serial number label is affixed inside the battery bay. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. The Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity is located on the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Wireless certification label or labelsProvide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the battery bay. Labels 17 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-

enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button, wireless switch, or wireless key (referred to in this chapter as the wireless button) HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Operating system controls 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (white) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is white, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through HP Connection Manager (select models only). Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) HP Connection Manager provides a central location for managing your wireless devices and an interface for sending and receiving SMS (text) messages. HP Connection Manager allows you to manage the following devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN)/Wi-Fi Bluetooth HP Connection Manager provides information and notifications on connection status, power status, subscriber identity module (SIM) details, and SMS (text) messages. Status information and notifications are provided in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. To open HP Connection Manager, select Start > All Programs > HP Help and Support > HP Connection Manager. For more details about using HP Connection Manager, see the HP Connection Manager software Help. Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. For more information, select Start > Help and Support. Connecting to a wireless network 19 Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless computer to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. 20 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in setting up a WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. NOTE:

It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to email that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a firewall. A firewall checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, see Help and Support. Connecting to a wireless network 21 Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If the device is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is off, press the wireless button. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. 2. Click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. Select your WLAN from the list. 4. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing NOTE:

Center, and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. 22 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents NOTE:

interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) 23 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices, like speakers, headphones, monitor, projector, TV, and, on select models, high-definition devices. Here are some of the entertainment features on your computer. Multimedia Features Component

(1)

(2) Internal microphones (2) HP TrueVision HD Webcam Description Record sound. Records video, captures still photographs, allows you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam, select Start > All Programs >

Communication and Chat > CyberLink YouCam. 24 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Component

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14) Webcam light Speakers (4) USB 2.0 ports (2) USB 3.0 ports (2) Optical drive Description On: The webcam is in use. Produce sound. Connect optional USB devices. For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 49. Connect optional USB 3.0 devices and provide enhanced USB power performance. Reads and writes (select models only) to an optical disc. Integrated subwoofer Provides superior bass sound. b key fn key Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack HDMI port Enables or disables Beats Audio when pressed in combination with the fn key. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio profile that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. You can also view and control the bass settings through the Windows operating system. To view and control the bass properties:

Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Beats Audio Control Panel. Enables or disables Beats Audio when pressed in combination with the b key. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Using the webcam Your computer has an integrated webcam, a powerful social networking tool that allows you to communicate up close with friends and colleagues next door or on the other side of the world. With the webcam, you can stream video with your instant messaging software, capture and share video, and take still photos. Using the webcam 25 To start the webcam, select Start > All Programs > Communication and Chat > CyberLink YouCam. For details about using the webcam, select Start > Help and Support. Using audio On your HP computer, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to USB ports (or the audio-out jack) on your computer or on a docking station. To connect speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Configuring audio settings (with HDMI TV) on page 31. Before connecting audio devices, be sure to adjust the volume. 26 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack on the computer. To connect wireless headphones or speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. Connecting a microphone To record audio, connect a microphone to the microphone jack on the computer. For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. Using Beats Audio Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Beats Audio Control Panel allows you to view and manually control audio and bass settings. To open Beats Audio Control Panel, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Beats Audio Control Panel. Enabling and Disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio, press the fn key in combination with the b key. The following table explains the meaning of the Beats Audio icons that appear on the screen when you press the Beats Audio hot key (fn+b). Icon Definition Beats Audio is enabled. Beats Audio is disabled. Using audio 27 Checking the sound To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. 2. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. Using video Your HP computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer, without needing to access a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. Most computers have a video graphics array (VGA) port, which connects analog video devices. Some computers also have an high-definition multimedia interface

(HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions if you have questions. 28 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting a VGA monitor or projector To see the computer screen image on an external VGA monitor or projected for a presentation, connect a monitor or projector to the computer's VGA port. To connect a monitor or projector:

1. Connect the VGA cable from the monitor or projector to the VGA port on the computer as shown. 2. Press f4 to alternate the screen image between 3 display states:

View the screen image on the computer. View the screen image on the external device (monitor or projector). View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. Using video 29 Connecting an HDMI TV or monitor To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions. To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, sold separately. To connect a high-definition TV or monitor to your computer:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 3 display states:

View the screen image on the computer. View the screen image on the external device (TV or monitor). View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. 30 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Configuring audio settings (with HDMI TV) HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. Right-click the Speaker icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Digital Output Device (HDMI). 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Using Intel Wireless Display (select models only) Intel Wireless Display allows you to transmit your computer content wirelessly to your TV by using an optional wireless TV adapter (purchased separately). For details about using the wireless adapter, see the manufacturer's instructions. To open Intel Wireless Display, select Start > All Programs > Intel WiDi. To enable Intel Wireless Display, select Start > All Programs > Intel Proset Wireless > Intel My WiFi Technology. NOTE: Before using the wireless display, be sure that your wireless device is turned on. Managing your audio and video files CyberLink PowerDVD helps you manage and edit your photo and video collections. To start CyberLink PowerDVD, select Start > All Programs > Music, Photos and Videos, and then click CyberLink PowerDVD. For more information about using CyberLink PowerDVD, see the PowerDVD software Help. Managing your audio and video files 31 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Your computer allows easy on-screen navigation. In addition to the keyboard, a TouchPad allows you to perform on-screen functions. Your computer may also have an integrated numeric keypad. Select models also have special action keys or hot key functions to perform routine tasks simply. In addition to the pointing devices, such as a TouchPad, included with your computer, you can use an external USB mouse (purchased separately) by connecting it to one of the USB ports on the computer. To customize pointing device settings, button configuration, click speed, and pointer options, select Start > Control Panel and type mouse in the search box in the upper right corner of the screen. Click Mouse. 32 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Using the keyboard The keyboard allows you to type and the action keys and hot keys allow you to perform specific functions. For more details about the keyboard keys, see Keys on page 14. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using ALT GR key combinations Some countries have keyboards with an ALT GR key that is used for special key combinations. To type the rupee symbol on a keyboard that includes this key, use the alt gr+4 key combination. Region-specific keyboards in India can use the ctrl+shift+4 keys for the rupee symbol. To learn about ALT GR key combinations, go to the Microsoft Office website, www.office.microsoft.com, and search for ALT GR. Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the f1 through f12 keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility (BIOS). See Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics on page 71 for instructions on opening Setup Utility (BIOS), and then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen. To activate the assigned function after disabling the action key feature, you must press the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Icon Key f1 f2 f3 f4 Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to customer support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. This action key can also alternate images among other devices that are receiving video information from the computer. Using the keyboard 33 Icon Key Description f5 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 Turns the radiance backlight keyboard feature off or on. NOTE: To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. 34 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Using the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key and either the esc key or the b key. To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the combination. Function Hot key Description Display system information. fn+esc Displays information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number. Control the bass settings. fn+b Enables or disables the Beats Audio bass settings. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio profile that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. You can also view and control the bass settings through the Windows operating system. To view and control the bass properties:

Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Beats Audio Control Panel. Using the keypad Using the integrated numeric keypad The computer includes an integrated numeric keypad, and it also supports an optional external numeric keypad or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. Component num lock key Integrated numeric keypad Description Controls the function of the integrated numeric keypad. Press the key to alternate between the standard numeric function of an external keypad (selected at the factory) and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys). NOTE: The keypad function that is active when the computer is turned off is reinstated when the computer is turned back on. Set at the factory to function like an external numeric keypad. To alternate between this numeric function and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys), press the num lock key. Using the keyboard 35 Using the TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) TouchPad light TouchPad on/off button TouchPad zone Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Description On: The TouchPad is off. Off: The TouchPad is on. Turns the TouchPad on or off. Moves the on-screen pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. To move the pointer, slide one finger across the TouchPad in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the buttons on an external mouse. Turning the TouchPad off or on To turn the TouchPad off or on, quickly double-tap the TouchPad on/off button. The TouchPad light is off when the TouchPad is on. 36 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Navigating To move the on-screen pointer, slide one finger across the TouchPad in the direction you want the pointer to go. Selecting Use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. Using the TouchPad 37 Using TouchPad gestures The TouchPad supports a variety of gestures that let your fingers swipe, pinch, and rotate to manipulate items on the desktop. To use TouchPad gestures, place two fingers on the TouchPad at the same time. NOTE: TouchPad gestures are not supported in all programs. To view the demonstration of a gesture:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Synaptics TouchPad. 2. Click a gesture to activate the demonstration. To turn the gestures off or on:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Synaptics TouchPad. Select the check box next to the gesture that you want to turn off or on. 3. Click Apply, and then click OK. 38 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. To scroll, place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad, and then drag them across the TouchPad in an up, down, left, or right motion. NOTE: Scrolling speed is controlled by finger speed. Pinching/Zooming Pinching allows you to zoom in or out on images or text. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad, and then moving them apart. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad, and then moving them together. Using the TouchPad 39 Rotating Rotating allows you to rotate items such as photos. To rotate, anchor your left forefinger in the TouchPad zone. Move the right forefinger around the anchored finger in a sweeping motion, moving from 12 oclock to 3 oclock. To reverse the rotation, move your right forefinger from 3 oclock to 12 oclock. NOTE: Rotating is disabled at the factory by default. Flicking Flicking allows you to navigate through screens or quickly scroll through documents. To flick, use three fingers to touch the TouchPad zone in a light, quick flicking motion up, down, left, or right. NOTE: Three-finger flicking is disabled at the factory by default. 40 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is only running on battery power and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Your computer supports power plans to manage how your computer uses and conserves power so that you can balance computer performance with power conservation. 41 Using Sleep or Hibernation Microsoft Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. NOTE: For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology (RST) feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. Rapid Start Technology manages your power-saving options as follows:

SleepRapid Start Technology allows you to select the Sleep state. To exit from Sleep, press any key, activate the TouchPad, or press the power button briefly. HibernationRapid Start Technology initiates Hibernation under the following conditions:

After 2 hours of inactivity when the computer is running on battery or external power. When the battery reaches a critical level. After Hibernation is initiated, press the power button to resume your work. Because Hibernation is controlled by Rapid Start Technology, you cannot manually select Hibernation. Rapid Start Technology can be disabled in Setup Utility (BIOS). If Rapid Start Technology is disabled, Hibernation options can be manually selected. When Sleep is initiated, the screen clears, and your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work faster than when you exit Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after a specific period of inactivity, depending on whether the computer is running on battery power or on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. Close the display. Select Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. 42 Chapter 6 Managing power Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and the computer displays the screen as it was when you stopped working. NOTE:

Windows password before the computer redisplays your work. If you have set the computer to require a password on wakeup, you must enter your Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after a specific period of inactivity, depending on whether the computer is running on battery power or on external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation on computers without Intel RST, select Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. The power lights turn on and the computer returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

password before the computer will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when exiting Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account NOTE:

password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. 5. Click Save changes. Using Sleep or Hibernation 43 Using the power meter The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the Power Meter icon, at the far right of the taskbar. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the Power Meter icon and select an item from the list. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The battery icon displays a message if the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Selecting a power plan A power plan manages how the computer uses power and helps you conserve power and maximize performance. The following power plans are available:

HP Recommended. Automatically balances performance with energy conservation. Power Saver. Saves power by reducing system performance and screen brightness. High Performance. Favors performance, but may use more energy. You can also create your own power plan and customize it to suit your needs. Use HP Power Manager (select models only) or Windows Control Panel to select a power plan or to create your own plan. To start HP Power Manager, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP Power Manager. To access the Power Options in the Control Panel, select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. 44 Chapter 6 Managing power Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power and the display brightness decreases to conserve battery life. The battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Removing a user-replaceable battery Your computer includes a user-replaceable battery. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the user-replaceable battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source for the computer can cause loss of information. So before removing the battery, save your work and initiate Hibernation, or shut down the computer through Windows. To remove the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latch (1) to release the battery. NOTE: The battery release latch automatically returns to its original position. 3. Pivot the battery (2) upward and remove it from the computer. Finding battery information Help and Support provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery Check tool in Help and Support to test battery performance Information about calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information, select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power Plans:

Frequently Asked Questions. Running on battery power 45 Conserving battery power Use the following tips for conserving battery power and maximizing battery life:

Lower the brightness on the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the computer when it is not being used or charged. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your computer, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the power meter icon in the notification area displays a low or critical battery notification. NOTE: For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter on page 44. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled, and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. Storing a user-replaceable battery CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If your computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately in a cool, dry place to prolong the battery charge. A stored battery should be checked every 6 months. If the capacity is less than 50 percent, recharge the battery before returning it to storage. 46 Chapter 6 Managing power Disposing of a user-replaceable battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. See the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for proper battery disposal. To access this guide, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Replacing a user-replaceable battery Battery Check in Help and Support notifies you to replace the battery when an internal cell is not charging properly or when the battery storage capacity has reached a weak condition. If the battery is possibly covered by an HP warranty, instructions include a warranty ID. A message refers you to the HP website for more information about ordering a replacement battery. Running on external power For information about connecting to AC power, see the Setup Instructions provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard an aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The display brightness increases. The Power Meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The Power Meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. Running on external power 47 Using HP CoolSense (select models only) HP CoolSense automatically detects when the computer is not in a stationary position and adjusts performance and fan settings to keep the surface temperature of your computer at the optimum level of comfort. When HP CoolSense is off, the position of the computer is not detected and the performance and fan options remain at the factory setting. As a result, the surface temperature of the computer may be higher than it would be with HP CoolSense on. To turn CoolSense off or on:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP CoolSense. Select On or Off. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command:

NOTE:

Hibernation before shutdown is possible. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select Start > Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then click the Shut down icon on the display. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. On models with a user-replaceable battery, remove the battery. 48 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Managing and sharing information Drives are digital storage devices or solid-state drives that help you store, manage, share, and access information. Your computer has an internal hard drive that stores your computer's software, operating system, as well as providing storage for all of your personal files. Some computers also have a built-in optical drive that allows you to read or write to a CD, DVD, or (on select models) Blu-

ray Disc (BD), to play and record audio and video. For added capacity or functionality, connect an external drive (purchased separately), such as an optical drive or hard drive, or insert a digital storage card to import information directly from your phone or camera. A USB flash drive, connected to the Universal Serial Bus (USB) port on your computer, also allows quick data transfer. Some devices use the computer's power to run; others have their own power source. Some devices come with software that must be installed. NOTE: For information about connecting external wireless devices, see Connecting to a network on page 18. NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, see the manufacturer's instructions. Using a USB device Most computers have more than one USB port, because this versatile interface allows you to connect to numerous kinds of external devices to your computer, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner, or USB hub. Your computer may have more than one type of USB port. See Getting to know your computer on page 3 for the types of USB ports you have on this computer. Be sure to purchase devices that are compatible with your computer. Type USB 2.0 USB 3.0 Description Transfers data at 60 MB/s. Transfers data at 640 MB/s. USB 3.0 ports, also known as SuperSpeed ports, are also compatible with USB 1.0 and 2.0 devices. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect the device. Using a USB device 49 Connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. NOTE: The USB port on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. A sound indicates that the device has been detected. NOTE: The first time you connect a USB device, a message in the notification area lets you know that the device is recognized by the computer. Removing a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. 1. To remove a USB device, save your information and close all programs associated with the device. 2. Click the remove hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Remove the device. Connecting a powered USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and its AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device to the computer. 2. 3. Plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. To disconnect an unpowered external device, stop the device, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. 50 Chapter 7 Managing and sharing information Inserting and removing digital storage cards To insert a digital storage card:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 2. Insert the card into the digital storage slot, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. A sound indicates that the device has been detected, and a menu of options displays. To remove a digital storage card:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the digital card. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. 2. Click the remove hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Then follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Press in on the card (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). NOTE:

If the card is not ejected, pull the card out of the slot. Inserting and removing digital storage cards 51 Using optical drives An optical disc drive uses laser light to read or store large amounts of information. Some drives can only read information, but others can also write (burn) information onto a blank disc. Use these tips for best performance of your optical drive:

When the battery is the only source of power, be sure the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while an optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Make sure you have installed the latest software updates for the drive. If the disc you are using is not clean, wipe it with a dry, lint-free, soft cloth. Your computer may include an optical drive that supports one or more of the following disc technologies:

CDA compact disc stores data that is read by a laser from the optical disc drive. The following CD formats are available:

CD-Recordable (CD-R), which allows the computer to read information and to record information one time on the CD. Once the information is recorded on the CD-R disc, it cannot be changed or erased; it is permanent. CD-Re-Writable (CD-RW), which allows you to read information and record information many times to the CD. Information on the CD can be erased. DVDA digital video disc is a high-capacity optical disc. It can store more information than a CD. A double-sided DVD can store up to 17 GB. The following DVD formats are available:

DVD-Recordable (DVD-R or DVD+R), which allow the computer to read information and to record information one time on the DVD. After the information is recorded on the disc, it cannot be changed or erased; it is permanent. The DVDs can be used in DVDR drives. DVD-Re-Writable (DVD-RW or DVD+RW), which allow to read information and record information many times to the disc. Information on the disc can be erased. The DVDs can be used in DVDR drives. BDa Blu-ray Disc holds more information than the other optical discs and they can used to record, rewrite, and play back high-definition (HD) video. Note the following when using BDs:

CyberLink PowerDVD is installed on the computer to play BD movies. Playing most BD movie titles on an external display requires an HDMI digital connection. The computer can support up to 1080p resolution on an external display, which requires a 1080p-

capable HDTV or monitor. Attempting to play a BD movie simultaneously on both the internal and an external display may cause an error, so choose only one. For copy protection purposes, Advanced Access Content System (AACS) keys are integrated into the computer. AACS keys require occasional renewal to support playback of new BD movie releases. The CyberLink PowerDVD program will request an update to continue playback when 52 Chapter 7 Managing and sharing information such a BD movie release is inserted in the drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the update. If lines appear on the display when viewing a BD, they may be caused by interference from the wireless network. To resolve the issue, close any open applications and turn off your wireless feature. Inserting an optical disc Turn on the computer. 1. 2. 3. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray. Pull out the tray (2). 4. Hold the disc by the edges to avoid touching the flat surfaces and position the disc label-side up over the tray spindle. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. 5. Gently press the disc (3) down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 6. Close the disc tray. NOTE: After you insert a disc, a short pause is normal. If you have not selected a media player, an AutoPlay dialog box opens. It prompts you to select how you want to use the media content. Using optical drives 53 Removing an optical disc 1. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray, and then gently pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 2. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 3. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. If the disc tray does not open normally, see Disc drive problems on page 84. Sharing drives on the network You can access software and data and install applications by sharing drives connected to another computer in your network. NOTE: Some discs, such as DVD movies and games, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD drive sharing. To share on the same network:

1. From the computer you are sharing, select Start > Computer. 2. Right-click what you want to share, and click Properties. 3. 4. 5. Select the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing. Select the Share this folder check box. Type a name in the Share name text box. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. 7. To view the shared drive:

Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 54 Chapter 7 Managing and sharing information 8 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter provides information about improving the performance of your computer by running tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup and by replacing a hard drive or adding memory. It also provides information about updating your programs and drivers, instructions for cleaning your computer, and tips for travelling with your computer. Improving performance Everyone wants a fast computer and by performing regular maintenance tasks, using tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup, you can drastically improve the performance of your computer. Also, as your computer gets older, you might consider installing larger drives and adding more memory. Handling drives Observe these precautions when handling drives:

Before removing or installing a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. Improving performance 55 Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while an optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Replacing a hard drive CAUTION: Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Do not drop a drive, place items on it, or expose it to liquids, or temperature or humidity extremes. See Handling drives on page 55 for specific precautions when handling drives. CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Before removing or installing a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 1. Save your work and shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 4. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 5. Remove the battery from the computer. NOTE: For more information, go to Removing a user-replaceable battery on page 45. Remove the hard drive:

NOTE: For computers with two hard drives, the removal procedure is the same but the hard drive cable for one hard drive will be longer than the cable for the other hard drive. 1. Slide the battery release latch (1) until the service door is released, slide the door out of the slot

(2), and then lift up and remove the door (3). 2. Disconnect the hard drive cable (1) from the system board. 3. Remove the 2 screws (2) from the hard drive. 56 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer 4. Slide the hard drive tab (3) to the left, and then lift the hard drive out of the hard drive bay. NOTE: After removing the hard drive from the computer, you must remove the hard drive bracket to access the hard drive itself. 5. Remove the 2 screws (1) from the hard drive bracket. 6. Remove the hard drive bracket (2) from the hard drive. 7. Disconnect the hard drive cable (3) from the hard drive. To install a hard drive, reverse this procedure. NOTE: When installing the second hard drive, carefully insert the hard drive cable under the cable clips before connecting the hard drive cable. Improving performance 57 Using HP 3D DriveGuard HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSD) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary. NOTE: Hard drives in the primary hard drive bay or in the secondary hard drive bay are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. Hard drives connected to USB ports are not covered by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Using Disk Defragmenter As you use your computer over time, the files on the hard drive become fragmented. A fragmented drive means data on your drive is not contiguous (sequential) and, because of this, the hard drive works harder to locate files, thus slowing down the computer. Disk Defragmenter consolidates (or physically reorganizes) the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. However, depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Connect the computer to AC power. 2. 3. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. 58 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer Adding or replacing memory modules Adding memory can help improve your computer's performance. Your computer is like your physical work area. The hard drive is the filing cabinet where you store your work and the memory is the desk where you work. When your memory isnt big enough to hold all your work easily, like a desk overflowing with work, your productivity slows down. A great solution to improve performance is to expand the amount of memory you have in your computer. The computer has two memory module slots. The memory module slots are located on the bottom of the computer under the service door. The memory capacity of the computer can be upgraded by adding a memory module or replacing the existing memory module in one of the memory module slots. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. NOTE: To use a dual-channel configuration with a second memory module, be sure that both memory modules are identical. To add or replace a memory module:

CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Shut down the computer before adding or replacing memory modules. Do not remove a memory module while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 1. Save your work and shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 4. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 5. Remove the battery from the computer. 6. Remove the service door from the computer. 7. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. Improving performance 59 b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and then gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 8. Insert a new memory module:

CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. a. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module compartment, press the module into the memory module slot (2) until it is seated. c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the module. 60 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer 9. Replace the service door. 10. Replace the battery. 11. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 12. Turn on the computer. Improving performance 61 Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis to the latest versions. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Technology is always changing, and updating programs and drivers allows your computer to run the latest technology available. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Cleaning your computer Cleaning your computer and external devices helps keep them in good working condition. If you don't clean your computer, dust and dirt particles can build up. CAUTION: Avoid using the following cleaning products to clean your computer:

Strong solvents, such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons, which can permanently damage the surface of the computer. Cleaning the display, sides, and cover Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Allow the display to dry before closing the computer cover. Use a pre-moistened germicidal wipe to clean the sides and cover. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard CAUTION: Never allow liquids to drip between the keys on the keyboard, even when you are cleaning the computer. This can permanently damage internal components. To clean and disinfect the TouchPad and keyboard, use a soft microfiber cloth or a static-free cloth without oil (such as a chamois cloth) moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner or use an acceptable germicidal disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. 62 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, here are some tips to keep in mind to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as digital storage cards, from the computer. Turn off, and then disconnect all external devices. Remove any media from the drive before removing the drive from a drive bay. CAUTION: Perform this action before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. This will help reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device installed, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 63 9 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Computer viruses Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility (BIOS) settings and other system identification information Security feature Power-on password Fingerprint reader Antivirus software Firewall software Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Software updates Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable lock 64 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information Locating your security software HP Security Assistant (select models only) provides a starting location for quick access to a collection of security software applications that are organized by task. Instead of searching for each application through the Start menu and Control Panel, HP Security Assistant allows you to access the applications for the following security tasks:

Setting up Internet and antivirus security. Backing up and recovering files. Managing passwords, user accounts, and parental controls. Maintaining your computer and installing the latest HP and Windows updates. Setting up the fingerprint reader (select models only). To open HP Security Assistant, select Start > All Programs > Security and Protection > HP Security Assistant. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every three months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start

> Help and Support. Locating your security software 65 Setting Windows passwords Password User password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. You may also set up your computer to require the user password to exit Sleep or Hibernation. See Setting password protection on wakeup on page 43 for more information. Administrator password Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. If you enter the power-on password at the first NOTE:

password check before the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

1. Open Setup Utility (BIOS) by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. 2. Use the arrow keys and follow the on-screen instructions. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f10. 3. Use the arrow keys to select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. 66 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select computer models. In order to use the fingerprint reader, you must set up a user account and password on the computer and then register one or more fingerprints using HP SimplePass software. For the location of the fingerprint reader on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 3. Using HP SimplePass HP SimplePass provides an easy-to-use interface to help secure your computer and simplify the way you log on to your computer and password-protected websites. Use a registered fingerprint to:

Log on to Windows. Access websites and other programs that require a logon. Set up a single sign-on service that allows you to use a registered fingerprint to create credentials for any application that requires a user name and password. Set up protected accounts on the computer for multiple users. For more information, see the HP SimplePass software Help. Registering fingerprints To register one or more fingerprints with HP SimplePass:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Security and Protection > HP SimplePass. 2. Have you found your fingerprint sensor?Click Yes. 3. Are you ready to enroll?Click Yes. 4. Select a finger. 5. Create Windows passwordEnter your password and confirm your password. 6. 7. Swipe your finger 3 times. A green circle is displayed on the finger if it is registered successfully. Otherwise, a warning message is displayed. Select another finger or click > to continue. 8. Click Register now or Register later. Repeat these steps for each additional user. Using your registered fingerprint to log on to Windows To log on to Windows using your fingerprint:

1. 2. After you register your fingerprints, restart Windows. Swipe any of your registered fingerprints to log on to Windows. Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) 67 Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. 68 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information Installing software updates HP, Microsoft Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 62. Installing Windows security updates Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer left the factory. Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer. Select Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update monthly thereafter. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft website and through the updates link in Help and Support. Installing HP and third-party software updates HP recommends that you regularly update the software and drivers that were originally installed on your computer. To download the latest versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. If you have installed third-party software after you purchased your computer, regularly update the software. Software companies provide software updates to their products to correct security problems and improve functionality of the software. Installing software updates 69 Securing your wireless network When you set up your wireless network, always enable security features. For more information, see Protecting your WLAN on page 21. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 74. Using an optional security cable lock A security cable lock, which is purchased separately, is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Security cable locks are only one of several methods that should be employed as part of a complete security solution to help maximize theft protection. The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. For the location of the security cable slot on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 3. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable lock around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the security cable lock (2). Insert the security cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the security cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 70 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) To start Setup Utility (BIOS), follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Setup Utility (BIOS). Information about how to navigate in Setup Utility (BIOS) is located at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 71 Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS). 2. Use the arrow keys to select Main. 3. To exit Setup Utility (BIOS) without saving your changes, use the tab key and the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. 2. 3. Select Start > Help and Support > Maintain. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your computer and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. b. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 72 Chapter 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using System Diagnostics System Diagnostics allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine if the computer hardware is functioning properly. To start System Diagnostics:

1. Turn on or restart the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f2. 2. Click the diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostics test while it is running, press esc. Using System Diagnostics 73 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Your computer includes tools provided by the operating system and HP to help you safeguard your information and retrieve it if ever needed. Creating backups 1. Use HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media immediately after you set up the working computer. 2. 3. As you add hardware and software programs, create system restore points. As you add photos, video, music, and other personal files, create a backup of your system and personal information. Creating recovery media to recover the original system After you successfully set up the computer, you should create recovery discs or a recovery flash drive using HP Recovery Manager. You will need these recovery discs or recovery flash drive to perform a system recovery should the hard drive become corrupted. A system recovery reinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the default programs. 74 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering What you need to know Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the flash drive or the number of blank DVD discs that will be required. Use DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL discs or a flash drive. Do not use rewriteable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, and BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive, you can use an optional external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from the HP website. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer, not to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take up to an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. Store the recovery media in a safe location, separate from the computer. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery media. The next time you open HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue the process. Creating the recovery media 1. Select Start and type recovery in the search field. Select Recovery Manager from the list. Allow the action to continue, if prompted. 2. Click Recovery Media Creation. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue. To recover, see Recovering the original system using HP Recovery Manager on page 78. Creating system restore points A system restore point is a snapshot of certain hard drive contents saved by Windows System Restore at a specific time. A restore point contains information such as registry settings that Windows uses. Restoring to a previous restore point allows you to reverse changes that have been made to the system since the restore point was created. Restoring to an earlier system restore point does not affect data files saved or emails created since the last restore point, but it does affect software you may have installed. For example, if you download a photo from a digital camera and then restore the computer to the state it was on the previous day, the photo remains on the computer. However, if you install photo viewing software and then restore your computer to the state it was on the previous day, the software will be uninstalled, and you won't be able to use it. Creating backups 75 What you need to know If you restore to a restore point and then change your mind, you can undo the restoration. You should create system restore points:

Before you add or change software or hardware Periodically, whenever the computer is running normally System Restore also saves shadow copies of files that have been changed since the last restore point was created. For more information about using shadow copies to restore, see Help and Support. Creating a system restore point 1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System Protection. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Click Create, and follow the on-screen instructions. To restore, see Restoring to a previous system restore point on page 78. Backing up system and personal information Your computer stores information that is important to you, such as files, emails, and photos, and you will want to keep that information even if you download a virus or the system stops working properly. How completely you are able to recover your files depends on how recent your backup is. As you add new software and data files, you should create backups on a regular basis. Tips for a successful backup Number backup discs before inserting them into the optical drive. Store personal files in the Documents, Music, Pictures, and Videos libraries, and back up these folders periodically. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to re-enter your preferences. To create a screen shot:

1. Display the screen you want to save. 2. Copy the screen image:

To copy only the active window, press alt+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document or graphics editing program, and then select Edit > Paste. The screen image is added to the document. 4. Save and print the document. 76 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering What you need to know You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a flash drive, a network drive, or discs. Connect the computer to AC power during backups. Allow enough time for the backup. Depending on files sizes, it may take more than an hour. Verify the amount of free space on your backup storage device before you back up. You should back up:

Before adding or changing software or hardware. Before the computer is repaired or restored. On a regular schedule to be sure you have recent copies of personal information. After you add many filesfor example, if you saved videos from a birthday party. Before using antivirus software to remove a malicious program. After adding information that is hard to replace, such as pictures, videos, music, project files, or data records. Creating a backup using Windows Backup and Restore Windows allows you to back up files using Windows Backup and Restore. You can select the level you want to back up, from individual folders to drives. The backups are compressed to save space. To back up:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Backup and Restore. Follow the on-screen instructions to schedule and create a backup. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of the computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. See Help and Support for more information. To restore, see Restoring specific files using Windows Backup and Restore on page 78. Creating backups 77 Restore and recovery Restoring to a previous system restore point Sometimes installing a software program causes your computer or Windows to behave unpredictably. Usually uninstalling the software fixes the problems. If uninstalling does not fix the problems, you can restore the computer to a previous system restore point (created at an earlier date and time). To restore to a previous system restore point, when the computer was running correctly:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System Protection. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Click System Restore, and follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring specific files If files are accidentally deleted from the hard disk and they can no longer be restored from the Recycle Bin, or if files become corrupt, restoring specific files is useful. Restoring specific files is also useful if you ever choose to recover the original system using HP Recovery Manager. You can only restore specific files that you have backed up before. Restoring specific files using Windows Backup and Restore Windows allows you to restore files that were backed up using Windows Backup and Restore:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Backup and Restore. Follow the on-screen instructions to restore your backup. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of the computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. See Help and Support for more information. Recovering the original system using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to repair or recover the computer to its original factory state. What you need to know HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the disc provided by the manufacturer. A system recovery should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. If you have not already tried restore points (see Restoring to a previous system restore point on page 78) and partial restores (see Restoring specific files on page 78), try them before using HP Recovery Manager to recover your system. A system recovery must be performed if the computer hard drive fails or if all attempts to correct any functional computer issues fail. 78 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering If the recovery media do not work, you can obtain recovery discs for your system from the HP website. The Minimized Image Recovery option is recommended for advanced users only. All hardware-

related drivers and software are re-installed, but other software applications are not. Do not interrupt the process until it is complete, otherwise the recovery will fail. Recovering using HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition (select models only), allows you to restore your system without the need for recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. This type of recovery can only be used if the hard drive is still working. To check for the presence of a recovery partition, select Start, right-click Computer then select Manage > Disk Management. If the recovery partition is present, a Recovery drive is listed in the window. NOTE: Recovery discs have been included if your computer did not ship with a recovery partition. 1. Access HP Recovery Manager in either of the following ways:

Select Start and type recovery in the search field. Select Recovery Manager from the list. or Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Then press f11 while the F11 (System Recovery) message is displayed on the screen. 2. Click System Recovery in the HP Recovery Manager window. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering using the recovery media 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive on your computer or an optional external optical drive, and then restart the computer. or Insert the recovery flash drive into a USB port on your computer, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 80. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the Press f9 at system bootup. Select the optical drive or the flash drive. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 79 Changing the computer boot order To change the boot order for recovery discs:

1. Restart the computer. 2. 3. Press esc while the computer is restarting, and then press f9 for boot options. Select Internal CD/DVD ROM Drive from the boot options window. To change the boot order for a recovery flash drive:

1. Insert the flash drive into a USB port. 2. Restart the computer. 3. 4. Press esc while the computer is restarting, and then press f9 for boot options. Select the flash drive from the boot options window. 80 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A 65 W 19 V dc @ 4.74 A 90 W 18.5 V dc @ 6.5 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Input power 81 Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 85C 5% to 95%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 185F 5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 15,240 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 50,000 ft 82 Chapter 12 Specifications 13 Troubleshooting and support Troubleshooting Contacting customer support 83 Troubleshooting Disc drive problems If the disc tray fails to open normally, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert the end of a paper clip into the release access (1) in the front bezel of the drive. Press in gently on the paper clip until the tray is released, and then pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 3. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 4. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. Wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:

Wireless device is not turned on. Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled. Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. Wireless device or router hardware has failed. NOTE: Wireless networking devices are included with select computer models only. If wireless networking is not listed in the feature list on the side of the original computer package, you may add wireless networking capability to the computer by purchasing a wireless networking device. 84 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and support Cannot connect to a WLAN If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is turned on and properly installed on your computer. 1. 2. If the wireless light is off or amber, press the wireless button, wireless switch, or wireless key to turn the wireless device on. Then try connecting to the WLAN again. If you are still unable to connect, follow the steps below. 1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the term wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver for the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information about troubleshooting WLANs, see the website links provided in Help and Support. Cannot connect to a preferred network You may not be able to connect to a preferred network because it is a security-enabled WLAN. You must have the security code to connect to this type of WLAN. See the next section for additional information. If entering a security code is not the problem, you may have a corrupted WLAN connection. Many times, Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection. If there is a network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network status icon in the notification area, follow these steps:

1. Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Troubleshooting 85 Current network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a security code (or network key) or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection on a secure network. The SSID and security code are alphanumeric codes that you enter into your computer to identify your computer to the network. For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. In the left panel, click Manage wireless networks. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:

that the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure 4. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 5. Click OK to save these settings. WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:

Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point. Temporarily disconnect wireless devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that other wireless devices are not interfering. If the connection does not improve, try forcing the device to reestablish all connection values:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. In the left panel, click Manage wireless networks. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. 86 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and support Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, see the router manufacturer's instructions. Network status icon is not displayed If the network status icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. Get the latest version of the WLAN device software and drivers for your computer from the HP website at http://www.hp.com. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's website for the latest software. To get the latest version of the WLAN device software for your computer, follow these steps:

1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. Select your country or region. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in the search box. 4. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

website for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Audio problems To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. 2. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. Troubleshooting 87 Power management problems Some possible causes for power management problems include the following:

Low battery levels AC adapter problems Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect an AC adapter. Connect an optional docking or expansion device. Connect an optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Initiate Hibernation. Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Replace the discharged user-replaceable battery with a charged battery, or connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. 2. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Troubleshooting an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights are off. To test the AC adapter:

1. Shut down the computer. 2. Remove the battery from the computer. 88 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and support 3. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 4. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet to make sure the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact customer support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Troubleshooting 89 Contacting customer support If the information provided in this user guide or in Help and Support does not answer your questions, you can contact HP Customer Support at http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. NOTE: For worldwide support, click Contact HP worldwide on the left side of the page, or go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Here you can:

Chat online with an HP technician. NOTE: When technical support chat is not available in a particular language, it is available in English. Email HP Customer Support. Find HP Customer Support worldwide telephone numbers. Locate an HP service center. 90 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and support 14 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, unplug it after being properly grounded and before removing a cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. If you need more information about static electricity or assistance with component removal or installation, contact customer support. 91 Index A AC adapter 5 action keys decrease screen brightness Help and Support 33 identifying 14 increase screen brightness 33 next track or section 34 play, pause, resume 34 previous track or section 34 radiance backlight keyboard 33 34 switch screen image 33 volume down 34 volume mute 34 volume up 34 wireless 34 airport security devices 55 antivirus software, using 68 audio functions, checking 28 audio-in (microphone) jack 6 audio-out (headphone) jack 6 B b key, identifying 14, 25 backing up software and information 70 backups 74 bass settings hot key 35 battery conserving power 46 disposing 47 replacing 47 storing 46 battery bay 16, 17 battery information, finding 45 battery power 45 battery release latch 16 92 Index battery temperature 46 Beats Audio 14, 25, 27, 35 Beats Audio Control Panel 27 Beats Audio hot key 27 BIOS determining version 72 downloading an update 72 updating 71 Bluetooth device 18, 22 Bluetooth label 17 boot order changing 80 buttons left TouchPad 10, 36 optical drive eject 4 power 12, 13 right TouchPad 10, 36 C cables USB 50 caps lock light, identifying 11 caring for your computer 62 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 checking audio functions 28 cleaning your computer 62 components bottom 16 display 8 front 3 left side 6 rear 7 right side 4 top 10 computer, traveling 46 configuring audio for HDMI 31 connecting to a WLAN 22 connector, power 5 conservation, power 46 corporate WLAN connection 22 critical battery level 46 CyberLink PowerDVD 31 D deleted files restoring 78 digital card inserting 51 Digital Media Slot, identifying 3 Disk Cleanup software 58 Disk Defragmenter software 58 drive media 42 E electrostatic discharge 91 esc key, identifying 14 external AC power, using 47 external devices 50 external monitor port 6, 29 external monitor port, identifying 25 F fingerprint reader using 67 fingerprint reader light 11 Fingerprint reader, identifying 12 fingerprints, registering 67 firewall software 68 flicking TouchPad gesture 40 fn key, identifying 14, 25, 35 Fun things to do 1 H hard drive HP 3D DriveGuard 58 hard drive bay, identifying 16 hard drive light 4 HDMI configuring audio 31 HDMI port, connecting 30 HDMI port, identifying 6, 25 Hibernation exiting 43 initiated during critical battery level 46 initiating 43 high-definition devices, connecting 30, 31 hot keys bass settings 35 description 35 display system information 35 using 35 HP 3D DriveGuard 58 HP and third-party software updates, installing 69 HP Connection Manager software 19 HP Recovery Manager 78 hubs 49 I input power 81 installing critical security updates 69 optional security cable lock 70 integrated numeric keypad, identifying 15, 35 integrated webcam light, identifying 8, 9, 25 Internet connection setup 21 Internet security software, using 8, 9, 24 68 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 6 audio-out (headphone) 6 network 6 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard backlight action key, identifying 34 keyboard hot keys, identifying 35 keypad, integrated numeric 15 keys action 14 b 14, 25 esc 14 fn 14, 25 num lock 15 Windows applications 14 Windows logo 14 L labels Bluetooth 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 regulatory 17 serial number 17 service 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 16 lights AC adapter 5 caps lock 11 fingerprint reader 11 hard drive 4 mute 11 optical drive 4 power 4, 11 TouchPad 10, 36 webcam 8, 9, 25 wireless 11 Disk Cleanup 58 Disk Defragmenter 58 memory module inserting 60 removing 59 replacing 59 memory module compartment, identifying 16 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity removing 59 label 17 mouse, external setting preferences 32 mute light, identifying 11 Intel Wireless Display 31 internal microphones, identifying M maintenance N network jack, identifying 6 num lock key, identifying 15, 35 O operating environment 82 operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical disc inserting 53 removing 54 optical drive eject button, identifying 4 optical drive light, identifying 4 optical drive, identifying 4, 25 optional external devices, using 50 original system recovery 78 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 66 Windows 66 pinching TouchPad gesture 39 ports external monitor 6, 25, 29 HDMI 6, 25, 30 Intel Wireless Display 31 USB 2.0 4, 25 USB 3.0 4, 6, 25 VGA 29 power battery 45 conserving 46 power button, identifying 12, 13 power connector, identifying 5 power lights, identifying 4, 11 power meter 44 PowerDVD 31 Product Key 17 product name and number, public WLAN connection 22 R readable media 42 recovering from the recovery discs 79 recovering the original system 78 Index 93 memory module service door, computer 17 recovery 78 HP Recovery Manager 78 system restore points 75 creating 75 video 28 W webcam 25 webcam light, identifying 8, 9 webcam, identifying 8, 9, 24 Windows applications key, identifying 14 Windows Backup and Restore restoring files 78 Windows logo key, identifying 14 Windows passwords 66 Windows security updates, installing 69 Wireless Assistant software 18 wireless button 18 wireless certification label 17 wireless controls button 18 operating system 18 Wireless Assistant software wireless light 11, 18 wireless module compartment, identifying 16 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 22 corporate WLAN connection 18 22 equipment needed 21 functional range 22 public WLAN connection 22 security 21 using 20 wireless network, securing 70 WLAN antennas, identifying 8, 9 WLAN device 17, 20 WLAN label 17 writable media 42 Z zooming TouchPad gesture 39 recovery discs 74 recovery media 74 recovery, system 78 regulatory information regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 restore points 75 restoring the original system creating recovery media 74 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 rotating TouchPad gesture 40 S scrolling TouchPad gesture 39 security cable lock, installing 70 security cable slot, identifying 5 security, wireless 21 serial number 17 serial number, computer 17 service labels setting password protection on locating 17 wakeup 43 setup of WLAN 21 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 66 shipping the computer 63 shutdown 48 Sleep exiting 42 initiating 42 slots Digital Media 3 security cable 5 software CyberLink PowerDVD 31 Disk Cleanup 58 Disk Defragmenter 58 HP Connection Manager 19 software updates, installing 69 speakers, identifying 8, 25 storing a battery 46 subwoofer, identifying 16, 25 supported discs 75 system information hot key 35 system recovery 78 94 Index T temperature 46 TouchPad buttons 10, 36 using 36 TouchPad gestures flicking 40 pinching 39 rotating 40 scrolling 39 zooming 39 TouchPad light 10, 36 TouchPad on/off button 10, 36 TouchPad zone, identifying 10, traveling with the computer 17, 36 46, 63 Troubleshooting and support 83 troubleshooting; AC adapter 88 troubleshooting; audio functions troubleshooting; disc drive 84 troubleshooting; low battery level 87 88 troubleshooting; power management 88 troubleshooting; wireless connection 84 turning off the computer 48 U unresponsive system 48 USB 2.0 ports, identifying 4, 25 USB 3.0 port, identifying 6, 25 USB 3.0 ports, identifying 4 USB cable, connecting 50 USB devices connecting 49 description 49 removing 50 USB hubs 49 using external AC power 47 using passwords 65 using the power meter 44 V vents, identifying 6, 7, 16 VGA port, connecting 29